WO2016157917A1 - Banknote-counting device - Google Patents
Banknote-counting device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2016157917A1 WO2016157917A1 PCT/JP2016/001890 JP2016001890W WO2016157917A1 WO 2016157917 A1 WO2016157917 A1 WO 2016157917A1 JP 2016001890 W JP2016001890 W JP 2016001890W WO 2016157917 A1 WO2016157917 A1 WO 2016157917A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- banknote
- bill
- unit
- guide
- state
- Prior art date
Links
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 claims description 137
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 31
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 claims description 14
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims description 9
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 28
- 210000000078 claw Anatomy 0.000 description 21
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 15
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 13
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 12
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000428 dust Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007688 edging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001771 impaired effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007480 spreading Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012780 transparent material Substances 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D3/00—Sorting a mixed bulk of coins into denominations
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D7/00—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency
- G07D7/04—Testing magnetic properties of the materials thereof, e.g. by detection of magnetic imprint
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D7/00—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency
- G07D7/06—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency using wave or particle radiation
- G07D7/12—Visible light, infrared or ultraviolet radiation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D9/00—Counting coins; Handling of coins not provided for in the other groups of this subclass
Definitions
- the technology disclosed herein relates to a bill counting device.
- Patent Document 1 describes a banknote counting device for identifying and counting banknotes.
- This device is a desktop type.
- This bill counting device is provided at the upper part of the housing and includes a take-in portion in which bills to be counted are placed, an identifying portion that is disposed in the housing and identifies bills, and bills after recognition are accumulated. And an accumulating unit.
- a banknote placed in a take-in unit (corresponding to a set unit for setting banknotes) is once sent into the housing, and thereafter, It is accumulated in a stacking part (corresponding to a holding part that holds bills) that opens to the outside of the body.
- a person can see the banknotes placed in the take-in section and can also see the banknotes accumulated in the stacking section.
- a person cannot see a banknote between the taking-in part and the stacking part.
- Such a bill counting device may be used when, for example, in a facility such as a game hall, a person in charge of the game hall performs identification and counting of a banknote handed over from a customer.
- a bill counting device By using the bill counting device, bills can be accurately counted.
- the bill is once taken into the bill counting device and disappears during counting, the bill is handed over from the customer and placed in the take-up portion, and passes through the inside of the housing and is collected in the stacking portion. It is difficult to show the customer that the bill is the same. As a result, the reliability of the counting result is impaired.
- the technology disclosed herein has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the technology is to make it possible to always view the bills to be counted during the counting operation.
- the technology disclosed herein relates to a bill counting device configured to identify and count bills.
- the bill counting device includes a set unit configured to set the bills to be counted, an identifying unit configured to identify and count the bills fed out from the set unit, and the identifying unit.
- One piece of the banknote that has a holding part configured to hold the banknote after identification, and a conveyance path that connects between the set part and the holding part, and that is fed out from the set part
- a conveyance unit configured to convey the identification unit to the holding unit after passing through the identification unit.
- the said setting part is comprised so that at least one part of the said banknote set to the said setting part can be seen, and the said holding
- the transport unit is configured so that at least a part of the banknote can be seen at all times while the banknote is being transported along the transport path.
- the banknote is transported from the set unit along the transport path to the holding unit.
- the identification unit performs identification and counting of the banknotes until the banknotes reach the holding unit from the set unit.
- the set unit is configured so that at least a part of the set banknote can be seen.
- the holding unit is also configured so that at least a part of the banknote held can be seen.
- the transport unit is configured to be able to always see a part of the bill being transported. You can also see the bills being transported.
- this banknote counting apparatus is configured so that the banknote can always be seen from the set part to the holding part through the identification part. Since this banknote counting apparatus counts while a person looks at a banknote, it is possible to ensure high reliability of the counting result.
- the said conveyance path is comprised by the guide arrange
- the opening part opened along the said conveyance path is provided between the said guides.
- the transport unit may transport the banknote along the transport path in a state where a part of the banknote protrudes from the opening.
- a conveyance part is comprised so that a banknote may be conveyed along a conveyance path in the state which a part of banknote protruded outside from the opening part provided between guides. A person can always see a banknote being conveyed.
- the said identification part is comprised by the tunnel shape which has the entrance part into which the said banknote approachs, and the exit part from which the said banknote retreats,
- the said identification part is a conveyance direction destination of the said banknote when the said banknote passes. It is good also as a shape which becomes a state before a part of the back side of the conveyance direction of the said banknote enters into the said entrance part in the state where the part of the side came out from the said exit part.
- the identification unit is configured in a tunnel shape in which bills entering from the entrance part exit from the exit part.
- the identification part is also in a shape in which a part of the banknote in the conveyance direction is out from the outlet part and a part of the banknote in the conveyance direction rear side is in a state before entering the inlet part. Therefore, even when the bill passes through the recognition unit, it is avoided that the entire bill enters the recognition unit and is not visible from the outside. A person can always see the banknote from the set part to the holding part through the identification part.
- the set part is open at least upward, and is configured to set the banknote in a state where the long edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the opening of the transport path opens upward.
- the conveying unit is configured to convey in the longitudinal direction in a state where the banknote is stood up so that an upper part of the banknote jumps out from the opening, and the holding unit is opened at least upward. It is good also as being comprised so that the said banknote may be hold
- the set unit Since the set unit is opened upward, banknotes set in a standing state on the set unit can be viewed from above the device. Since the holding portion is also opened upward, the banknote held in the state where it is raised on the holding portion can be seen from above the apparatus. Moreover, since the banknote currently conveyed along a conveyance path is the state stood up so that it might jump out from the opening part opened upwards, it can be seen from the upper direction of an apparatus. Thus, when the bill counting device counts bills, a person can always see the bill from above the device.
- the said identification part has an optical sensor which acquires the image of the surface of the said banknote, and a back surface, a thickness sensor which detects the thickness of the said banknote, and a magnetic sensor which detects the magnetic characteristic of the said banknote,
- the said optical sensor Is extended and arranged over the entire short length of the banknote transported longitudinally, and the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor are respectively below the opening and the banknote It is good also as arrange
- the optical sensor is arranged extending over the entire short length of the banknote, it is possible to acquire an image of the entire front surface and an image of the entire back surface of the banknote.
- Information used for identification (for example, identification of true / false, harm, and denomination) can be increased, and the accuracy of identification is improved.
- identification can be performed quickly based on a large amount of information, and the time required for identification is shortened.
- the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor are disposed below the opening of the transport path and at a height corresponding to a portion covered with the guide in the banknote in a standing state. For this reason, the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor cannot acquire information on the portion of the banknote that protrudes from the opening. However, if it is only to determine whether or not two or more banknotes are overlapped by detecting the thickness of the banknotes, it is possible to make an accurate determination by detecting the thickness in a part of the banknotes. .
- this bill counting device can count while a person is viewing the bill to be counted. Even if the amount of information that can be acquired by the magnetic sensor is reduced, the banknote can be identified by the information acquired by the magnetic sensor and the information that is visually recognized by the person. It is possible to ensure high reliability.
- the optical sensor, the thickness sensor, and the magnetic sensor may be sequentially arranged in the banknote transport direction.
- the set part is open at least upward, and is configured to set the banknote in a state where the long edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the opening of the transport path opens upward.
- the conveying unit is configured to convey in the longitudinal direction in a state where the banknote is stood up so that an upper part of the banknote jumps out from the opening, and the holding unit is opened at least upward. And is configured to hold the banknote in a state where the longitudinal edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the inlet portion of the identification unit has an upward slope with respect to the conveyance direction of the banknote. It may be inclined.
- the entrance is inclined so as to have an upward slope.
- the bill enters the entrance portion while the edge portion and the entrance portion gradually intersect. This makes it possible to correct the bending and folding of the edge on the side of the banknote conveyance direction.
- the banknotes are prevented from being jammed at the entrance of the identification unit.
- the guide roller for feeding the banknote into the identification unit may be disposed at a position in the transport direction corresponding to the inclined portion of the entrance unit.
- a force is applied to the location of the guide roller that feeds out banknotes.
- positioning a guide roller in the position of the conveyance direction corresponding to the inclination location of an entrance part the intensity
- the banknote counting device is further provided with a cover member that is provided so as to cover the banknotes that have jumped out from the opening, and is transported along the transport path. At least a part of the banknote may be configured to be always visible through the cover member.
- At least a part of the transport path is made of a light transmissive material, and at least a part of the banknotes transported along the transport path is made of the light transmissive material in the transport path. It may be configured so that it can be always seen through the configured part.
- the device 1 performs bill identification and counting.
- the device 1 identifies at least the authenticity and denomination of the banknote.
- the device 1 can identify and count a plurality of currencies.
- the currency to be counted is set in advance.
- the currency to be counted can be changed.
- the apparatus 1 is used for identifying and counting bills handed over from customers in facilities such as a game hall, for example. For example, a customer hands a bill to a person in charge at a game hall when the bill is exchanged for a chip used for a game.
- the device 1 is a desktop type that is used by being placed on a table, counter, desk, table or the like.
- the device 1 is small and does not take up space when placed on a table or the like.
- the right front side of FIG. 1 is referred to as the front of the apparatus 1
- the left back side of the paper is referred to as the back of the apparatus 1
- the right back side of the paper is referred to as the right of the apparatus 1
- the left front side of FIG. The person in charge usually uses the apparatus 1 with the front side of the apparatus 1 facing toward him.
- the apparatus 1 is composed of two parts, an upper part 11 and a lower part 12, overlapping in the vertical direction.
- the upper part 11 and the lower part 12 of the device 1 are separated by a partition plate 13.
- the upper part 11 of the apparatus 1 is configured to perform identification and counting while conveying bills to be counted.
- the apparatus 1 includes a set unit 2 configured to set bills to be counted, an identification unit 3 configured to identify and count banknotes, and a configuration configured to hold the identified banknotes. And a transport unit 5 configured to transport the banknotes fed from the set unit 2 one by one through the identification unit 3 to the holding unit 4.
- the lower part of the apparatus 1 is configured to accommodate various devices necessary for operating the apparatus 1. Specifically, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the lower part of the apparatus 1 accommodates a control unit 6 (see FIG. 4) that controls the operation of each unit 2, 3, 4, and 5. The lower part of the apparatus 1 also houses a motor that is a driving source for various operations performed in each of the units 2, 3, 4, and 5, a gear that transmits driving force, and the like. Further, a connector 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 23) is provided at the lower portion of the apparatus 1. The connector 7 is connected to a power cord for supplying power to the device 1 and a cable for connecting the device 1 to the external device or connecting the external device to the device 1.
- the apparatus 1 also includes two displays, a first display 81 and a second display 82, in the example disclosed herein.
- the first display 81 is a display mainly for the person in charge to see.
- the second display 82 is a display mainly for the customer to see.
- the display contents of the first display 81 and the second display 82 can be confirmed from a monitoring camera attached to a ceiling portion of a facility such as a game hall, for example.
- the set unit 2 is arranged on the right side of the front part of the apparatus 1 as shown in FIGS.
- the upper surface of the partition plate 13 functions as a set surface on which the bills B are set in the setting unit 2.
- the setting unit 2 is configured to set the banknote B in a state where the long edge of the banknote B is down and standing on the upper surface of the partition plate 13.
- the set unit 2 is opened above and forward of the device 1.
- the banknote B is set in the set unit 2
- the upper part of the banknote B and the rear part in the transport direction (as will be described later, the leading side in the transport direction of the banknote B is the tip of the banknote B, and the opposite side is the back of the banknote B.
- the rear part of time jumps up and forward of the device 1, respectively.
- the person in charge and the customer can see at least a part of the bill B set in the setting unit 2.
- the setting unit 2 is configured to be able to set a plurality of banknotes B at a time in a state where they are arranged in the horizontal direction. Banknotes B of different sizes may be mixed together.
- the set unit 2 has a bill B feeding mechanism. The feeding mechanism feeds the bills B set in the setting unit 2 one by one.
- the identification unit 3 is arranged on the right side of the central portion of the apparatus 1 in the front-rear direction.
- the identification unit 3 and the set unit 2 are adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction of the device 1.
- the identification unit 3 includes an entrance 341 through which the bill B enters and an exit 342 from which the bill B exits.
- the banknotes drawn out from the set unit 2 pass through the identification unit 3.
- the identification unit 3 has a sensor that acquires information about the banknote B.
- the identification unit 3 determines whether the banknote B is an acceptable normal banknote or an unacceptable reject banknote based on information acquired by the sensor when the banknote B passes.
- the identification unit 3 also counts normal banknotes.
- the holding part 4 is arranged on the left side of the front part of the device 1.
- the holding unit 4 and the set unit 2 are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction of the device 1.
- the upper surface of the partition plate 13 functions as a holding surface that holds the banknote B in the holding unit 4.
- the holding unit 4 holds the bill B in a state where the bill B is erected on the upper surface of the partition plate 13 with the longitudinal edge of the bill B facing down.
- maintenance part 4 is comprised so that the several banknote B can be hold
- the holding part 4 is opened upward, forward and leftward of the device 1. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the upper part of the bill B held by the holding unit 4 jumps upward from the holding unit 4. The person in charge and the customer can see the bill B held in the holding unit 4.
- the conveyance unit 5 has a conveyance path provided from the setting unit 2 to the holding unit 4. As shown in FIG. 3, the conveyance path includes a first conveyance path 51, a second conveyance path 52, and a third conveyance path 53. The conveyance path as a whole is arranged so as to form a U shape in plan view.
- the conveyance unit 5 conveys the sheet B one by one in a state where banknotes B are erected on the upper surface of the partition plate 13.
- Each of the transport paths 51, 52, and 53 is configured by guides 55, 56, and 57 that are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction.
- the guides 55, 56, and 57 are opposed to the front and back surfaces of the bill B that is conveyed in an upright state.
- the heights of the guides 55, 56, and 57 are lower than the height of the bill B (that is, the short length).
- An opening 50 that opens upward is provided between the guides. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the upper part of the bill B being conveyed jumps upward from the opening 50. The person in charge and the customer can see the bill B being conveyed.
- a branch path 58 is connected to a connection portion between the first transport path 51 and the second transport path 52.
- a reject portion 54 is configured by a part of the second conveyance path 52 and the branch path 58.
- the reject part 54 is a part that discharges the banknote B determined as a reject banknote by the identifying part 3.
- the reject part 54 opens upward and opens on the right side surface of the rear part of the apparatus 1 to form a reject port 54a.
- a part of the reject banknote B paid out to the reject unit 54 jumps out from the reject port 54 a to the right side of the apparatus 1, and an upper part of the reject banknote B is the reject unit 54. Jump upward from. The person in charge and the customer can see the reject banknote B.
- FIG. 4 shows a block diagram related to the operation of the apparatus 1.
- the set unit 2, the identification unit 3, the holding unit 4, and the transport unit 5 are electrically connected to the control unit 6 so that signals can be transmitted and received.
- the first display 81 and the second display 82 are also electrically connected to the control unit 6.
- the first display 81 is configured by a touch panel type display. The person in charge can perform various operations on the first display 81.
- the second display 82 is not a touch panel display, and only displays. The first display 81 and the second display 82 display at least the count result.
- the controller 6 is connected with a first sensor 61, a second sensor 62, a third sensor 63, a fourth sensor 64, and a fifth sensor 65.
- Each of the first to fifth sensors 61 to 65 detects the bill B and outputs a detection signal to the control unit 6.
- the first sensor 61 is disposed in the vicinity of the set unit 2.
- the first sensor 61 detects that the bill B is set in the setting unit 2.
- the second sensor 62 is disposed in the second transport path 52. When the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the bill B, the conveyance between the normal bill and the reject bill is switched as will be described later.
- the third sensor 63 is disposed in the third conveyance path 53.
- the third sensor 63 detects that the banknote B has been paid out to the holding unit 4.
- the fourth sensor 64 is disposed in the vicinity of the reject port 54a.
- the fourth sensor 64 detects that the banknote B paid out to the reject port 54a has been extracted from the reject port 54a.
- the fifth sensor 65 is disposed in the holding unit 4.
- the fifth sensor 65 detects that the banknote B held by the holding unit 4 has been removed.
- the counting operation of the device 1 will be described.
- the first sensor 61 detects the banknote B.
- the control unit 6 receives the detection result of the first sensor 61 and feeds the bills B from the set unit 2 one by one.
- the bill B fed out from the set unit 2 passes through the identification unit 3.
- the identification part 3 acquires the information regarding the banknote B with a sensor, and determines whether each banknote is an acceptable normal banknote or an unacceptable reject banknote based on the information. For example, when the bill B is a currency other than the currency to be counted, it is determined to be a reject bill. Moreover, when two or more banknotes are overlapped and conveyed, it is determined that the banknote is a reject banknote. Furthermore, it is determined that the bill with uncertain authenticity is also a reject bill.
- the identification unit 3 also identifies the denomination of normal banknotes. The identification unit 3 also counts normal banknotes.
- the banknote B that has passed through the identification unit 3 is transported by the transport unit 5 to reach the second transport path 52 from the first transport path 51. If the bill B is a normal bill when the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the bill B, the bill B is transported to the third transport path 53 as it is.
- the bill B that has reached the third transport path 53 passes through the third sensor 63 and is then paid out to the holding unit 4.
- the holding unit 4 sequentially holds the banknotes B that have been paid out.
- the bills B are held side by side in the horizontal direction.
- the control unit 6 feeds the next banknote B from the set unit 2.
- the control unit 6 displays the count value on the first display 81 and the second display 82 in real time during the counting operation.
- the control unit 6 When the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the banknote B, if the banknote B is a reject banknote, the control unit 6 temporarily stops the transport unit 5. Then, the control part 6 operates the conveyance part 5 so that the banknote B located in the 2nd conveyance path 52 is conveyed in reverse direction. The bill B is transported from the second transport path 52 toward the branch path 58 and is paid out to the reject unit 54. In this state, the operation of the device 1 stops. The person in charge removes the reject banknote B paid out to the reject unit 54 by hand. When the fourth sensor 64 detects that the reject banknote B has been removed, the control unit 6 resumes the counting operation of the device 1.
- the control unit 6 displays the counting result, that is, the total amount, in the first display 81 and the second display 82. To display. Thus, the counting operation of the device 1 is completed. After the counting is completed, the person in charge removes the banknote B held by the holding unit 4 by hand. The fifth sensor 65 detects that the banknote B has been removed.
- the first transport path 51 includes a first guide 55 and a second guide 56.
- the second transport path 52 includes a second guide 56 and a third guide 57.
- the third conveyance path 53 includes a second guide 56 and a third guide 57.
- the branch path 58 includes a first guide 55 and a third guide 57.
- the first guide 55 extends in the front-rear direction on the right side of the apparatus 1 from the rear part of the apparatus 1 to the center part in the front-rear direction.
- the first guide 55 constitutes a part of the right side surface of the device 1.
- the first guide 55 also constitutes a part of the identification unit 3 on one side across the conveyance path of the bill B.
- the second guide 56 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the device 1.
- the second guide 56 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear part to the front end part of the apparatus 1.
- the second guide 56 constitutes a part of the set part 2 and a part of the holding part 4.
- the second guide 56 also constitutes a part of the identification unit 3 on one side across the conveyance path of the bill B.
- the third guide 57 constitutes a part of the rear surface of the apparatus 1 and a part of the left side surface.
- the third guide 57 is substantially L-shaped in plan view.
- the first guide 55 and the third guide 57 are arranged so as to surround the second guide 56 arranged in the central portion of the apparatus 1.
- the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 configured by the first guide 55, the second guide 56, and the third guide 57 are U-shaped in plan view.
- An opening 50 that opens upward is provided along the U-shaped conveyance path.
- each of the first guide 55, the second guide 56, and the third guide 57 is lower than the short length of the smallest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1.
- the banknote B jumps upwards from the opening part 50 opened upwards. For this reason, a person can see the bill B being conveyed from above the apparatus 1.
- this apparatus 1 has the set part 2 opened upward and forward. A person can see the bill B set in the setting unit 2 from above the device 1.
- the several banknote B set to the setting part 2 is located in the horizontal direction in the respectively standing state. All of the plurality of banknotes B set in the setting unit 2 can be viewed from above the apparatus 1.
- the holding part 4 is also opened upward, forward and leftward. A person can see the banknote B held in the holding unit 4 from above the device 1. Moreover, the several banknote B hold
- the person in charge and the customer can always see the bill B from above the device 1 while the device 1 is counting. Thereby, the apparatus 1 can ensure the high reliability of the counting result.
- the banknotes B are conveyed in the longitudinal direction in a standing state. Unlike this, you may comprise a banknote counter so that the banknote B may be conveyed longitudinally or short-sided. In this configuration, for example, a part of the bill B being conveyed may be caused to jump out of the opening to the side of the bill counting device.
- a cover member 510 made of a light transmissive material may be attached in the transport unit 5.
- the bills B transported along the transport paths 51, 52, 53 can always be viewed through the cover member 510.
- the cover member 510 can protect the bill B being conveyed.
- the banknote B can be transported smoothly.
- a part of banknote B currently conveyed along each conveyance path can be seen. You may comprise so that it can do.
- the guide need not be lower than the height of the bill B as described above. That is, a part of the bill B being transported is transported along each transport path through the portion of the guide made of a transparent material without having to jump out from the opening provided between the guides. It becomes possible to see at least a part of the bill B.
- FIG. 5 shows a portion of the identification unit 3 formed on the second guide 56.
- FIG. 10 shows a portion of the identification unit 3 formed on the first guide 55.
- the identification unit 3 includes an optical sensor 31 that acquires images of the front and back surfaces of the bill B, a thickness sensor 32 that detects the thickness of the bill B, and a magnetic sensor 33 that detects the magnetic characteristics of the bill B.
- the bill B Based on the image of the bill B acquired by the optical sensor 31 and the magnetic properties of the bill B acquired by the magnetic sensor 33, it is determined whether the bill B is a currency to be counted, whether it is a genuine note or a fake note , Whether it is a genuine note or a non-defective note, and the denomination of the bill B are determined. Moreover, based on the information of the thickness of the banknote B detected by the thickness sensor 32, it is determined whether the banknote B is one sheet or two or more sheets are overlapped and conveyed.
- the optical sensor 31 is disposed on each of the front side and the back side of the banknote B that is transported in the longitudinal direction with the longitudinal edge thereof standing downward.
- the optical sensor 31 is disposed so as to extend over the entire short length of the bill B.
- the upper end of the optical sensor 31 is a position higher than the upper end of the largest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1 shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG.
- the thickness sensor 32 is disposed on the advance side of the optical sensor 31 in the transport direction (that is, the direction from the left to the right in FIG. 5).
- the thickness sensor 32 is configured by a roller that is disposed on the front side and the back side of the banknote B that is conveyed longitudinally in an upright state, and that sandwiches the banknote B in the thickness direction.
- the thickness sensor 32 and the optical sensor 31 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation.
- the thickness sensor 32 is also disposed at a predetermined height position from the partition plate 13.
- the thickness sensor 32 is disposed at a height corresponding to the portion of the bill B covered by the guide 55. The height of the thickness sensor 32 corresponds to approximately the center in the short direction of the largest bill B (see the two-dot chain line in FIG.
- the magnetic sensor 33 is disposed on the advance side in the transport direction with respect to the thickness sensor 32. Therefore, the optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are arranged in this order from the front to the rear of the apparatus 1.
- the magnetic sensor 33 and the thickness sensor 32 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation.
- the magnetic sensor 33 is also disposed at a predetermined height position from the partition plate 13.
- the magnetic sensor 33 is disposed at a height corresponding to the portion of the bill B covered by the guide 55.
- the height of the magnetic sensor 33 corresponds to approximately the center in the short direction of the smallest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1.
- the optical sensor 31 is disposed so as to extend over the entire short length of the banknote B, it is possible to acquire images of the entire front surface and back surface of the banknote B. Since the amount of information used for identification increases, the accuracy of identification is improved. Moreover, identification can be performed quickly based on a large amount of information, and the time required for identification is shortened.
- the thickness sensor 32 and the magnetic sensor 33 are disposed below the opening 50 of the conveyance path.
- the thickness sensor 32 and the magnetic sensor 33 cannot acquire information on the portion of the banknote B that has popped out from the opening 50.
- an accurate determination can be made if the thickness is detected in a part of the banknote B. Is possible.
- the device 1 can perform counting while watching a bill B to be counted. Even if the amount of information that can be acquired by the magnetic sensor 33 decreases, the accuracy and reliability of the identification of the device 1 does not decrease.
- the identification unit 3 includes a cover unit 34 that covers the optical sensor 31.
- the cover part 34 protrudes above the first guide 55 and the second guide 56.
- the cover part 34 extends in the front-rear direction of the apparatus 1 (the left-right direction in FIG. 5). This prevents light from entering the location where the optical sensor 31 is disposed.
- an inlet portion 341 into which the bill B enters is formed on the front side of the cover portion 34.
- the exit part 342 from which the banknote B withdraws is formed in the rear side of the cover part 34.
- the identification part 3 becomes a tunnel shape.
- the inlet portion 341 continues to the set portion 2.
- the outlet 342 is continuous with the opening 50 of the transport unit 5. The distance from the upper surface of the partition plate 13 to the upper ends of the inlet portion 341 and the outlet portion 342 is longer than the short length of the largest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1.
- the optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are all located within the range from the upper surface of the partition plate 13 to the upper ends of the inlet portion 341 and the outlet portion 342.
- the optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are all located on the side of the bill B that is conveyed in an upright state.
- the entrance portion 341 is inclined so as to have an upward gradient with respect to the conveyance direction of the bill B.
- the root of the inclined portion of the inlet portion 341 is located at the upper end portion of the set portion 2.
- the inclination angle ⁇ of the inlet portion 341 is 45 ° or less in the apparatus 1 shown in FIG.
- a grip roller 35 is disposed on the front side of the device 1 with respect to the optical sensor 31.
- the grip roller 35 is disposed at a distance that does not affect the operation of the optical sensor 31.
- a guide roller 36 is disposed on the front side of the apparatus 1 with respect to the grip roller 35.
- the guide roller 36 is disposed at a position in the transport direction corresponding to the inclined portion of the inlet portion 341.
- the guide roller 36 is a roller that feeds the banknote B into the identification unit 3.
- the guide roller 36 and the grip roller 35 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation.
- the bill B sent to the identification unit 3 by the guide roller 36 surely passes the identification unit 3 by the grip roller 35.
- the guide roller 36 may be omitted as long as the bill B can be smoothly fed into the identification unit 3 by the grip roller 35 and the separation roller 37 described later.
- the separation roller 37 rotates in the direction opposite to the feeding direction of the bills B in order to feed the bills B one by one from the setting unit 2.
- the separation roller 37 and the guide roller 36 are disposed at a distance that does not affect the operation of each other.
- the identification unit 3 has an entrance 341 and an exit 342, and is configured in a tunnel shape through which the bill B passes. As shown in FIG. 5, when the bill B passes through the identification unit 3, a portion of the bill B in the transport direction ahead side exits from the outlet 342, and a portion of the bill B in the transport direction rear side is the entrance portion. This is the state before entering 341 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 5).
- the cover 34 of the identification unit 3 is configured so that the length in the front-rear direction does not become too long.
- the distance L from the root of the inlet 341 to the root of the outlet 342 is shorter than the longitudinal length of the banknote B having the smallest size among the banknotes B that can be counted in the apparatus 1.
- the device 1 can perform counting while a person always looks at the banknote B. This device 1 can ensure high reliability of the counting result.
- the optical sensor 31 of the identification unit 3 is made longer than the short length of the bill B, and the identification unit 3 is formed in a tunnel shape.
- the length of the optical sensor 31 may be shortened until it becomes equal to or less than the height of the first guide 55 and the second guide.
- the cover part 34 of the identification part 3 can be omitted.
- the identification unit 3 does not have to be in a tunnel shape.
- the optical sensor 31 acquires an image of a part of the bill B. Even in this case, the bill B can be identified.
- the first guide 55 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear portion of the device 1 to the center portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the device 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the first guide 55 has an I shape in plan view.
- the first guide 55 constitutes a part of the right side surface of the device 1 as shown in the left views of FIGS. 2 and 8.
- the first guide 55 extends from the upper part 11 to the lower part 12 of the device 1.
- the lower end of the first guide 55 so as to be rotatable on the rotation shaft X 1 around 8 and 9, is attached to the device 1.
- the first guide 55 switches between a state where the first guide 55 stands on the right side of the device 1 and a state where the first guide 55 is inclined to the right side of the device 1 as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8. As shown in FIG. 9, the angle range theta 1 which the first guide 55 is rotated it is 45 °. The first guide 55 may be rotated by 90 ° or less angle range theta 1.
- the third guide 57 is substantially L-shaped in plan view. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the third guide 57 constitutes a part of the rear surface of the apparatus 1 and a part of the left side surface. The third guide 57 is provided above the partition plate 13. The third guide 57 is provided only in the upper part 11 of the device 1. Third guide 57 has a lower end portion of the portion constituting the third conveyance path 53, so as to be rotatable on the rotation shaft X 2 around 8 and 9, is attached to the device 1. The third guide 57 is placed on the partition plate 13 as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, and the state where the third guide 57 falls apart from above the partition plate 13 as shown in the right diagram of FIG. Switch to As shown in FIG. 9, the angular range ⁇ 2 in which the third guide 57 rotates is 90 °. Note that the third guide 57 may be rotatable in an angle range ⁇ 2 of 90 ° or more.
- the second guide 56 is disposed inside the apparatus 1 with respect to the first guide 55 and the third guide 57. Unlike the first guide 55 and the third guide 57, the second guide 56 is fixed to the device 1.
- the first conveyance path 51 includes a use state where the distance between the first guide 55 and the second guide 56 is short, and a first guide as illustrated in the right diagram of FIG. 8.
- the first guide 55 As the 55 rotates toward the right side of the apparatus 1, the first guide 55 is switched to an open state away from the second guide 56.
- the first transport path 51 is opened to the right side of the apparatus 1.
- the identification part 3 When the 1st conveyance path 51 will be in an open state, the identification part 3 will also be in an open state.
- the second conveyance path 52 and the third conveyance path 53 are shown in a use state in which the distance between the third guide 57 and the second guide 56 is short, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, and in the right diagram of FIG.
- the third guide 57 rotates toward the left side of the device 1
- the third guide 57 is switched to an open state away from the second guide 56.
- the second transport path 52 is opened behind the device 1.
- the third conveyance path 53 is opened to the left side of the apparatus 1.
- By rotating the L-shaped third guide 57 by 90 ° both the second transport path 52 and the third transport path 53 can be opened.
- the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are opened in different directions.
- the device 1 stops.
- the banknote B is jammed in the first conveyance path 51
- the person in charge turns the first conveyance path 51 to the open state by rotating the first guide 55 outwardly to the right of the apparatus 1.
- the first transport path 51 is opened outward at the right side portion of the apparatus 1. The person in charge can see the banknote B jammed in the 1st conveyance path 51, and can remove the said banknote B easily.
- the person in charge rotates the third guide 57 to the left outward of the device 1.
- the 2nd conveyance path 52 and the 3rd conveyance path 53 are made into an open state.
- the second transport path 52 is opened outward at the rear part of the apparatus 1.
- the third conveyance path 53 is opened outward at the left side of the apparatus 1. The person in charge can see the banknote jammed in the 2nd conveyance path 52 or the 3rd conveyance path 53, and can remove the said banknote B easily.
- first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are each opened upward. Thereby, it is possible to photograph the opened first transport path 51, second transport path 52, and third transport path 53 from a monitoring camera attached to the ceiling of a facility such as a game hall, for example.
- a monitoring camera attached to the ceiling of a facility such as a game hall, for example.
- the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are each largely opened toward the outside of the device 1 in three different directions. For this reason, it is possible to easily clean dust and dirt collected in the transport path.
- the identification unit 3 can be opened. As shown in the right view of FIG. 8, the identification unit 3 is provided with an optical sensor 31, a thickness sensor 32, and a magnetic sensor 33. When the identification unit 3 is opened, all of these sensors 31, 32, and 33 are exposed. Therefore, maintenance of these sensors 31, 32, and 33 can be performed.
- the first guide 55 extends from the upper part 11 to the lower part 12 of the device 1.
- the first guide 55 is long in the vertical direction.
- the 3rd guide 57 Since the 3rd guide 57 is provided only in the upper part 11 of the apparatus 1, the height is comparatively low. Therefore, even if the rotation angle ⁇ 2 of the third guide 57 is increased, the occupied space of the device 1 when the third guide 57 is rotated outward of the device 1 is large as shown in FIG. Don't be.
- the first guide 55 and the third guide 57 are attached to the apparatus 1 so as to rotate about the rotation axes X 1 and X 2 extending in the horizontal direction. And / or the third guide 57 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to rotate around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, for example.
- first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 are not attached to rotate, but the first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 are, for example, the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or any other direction. You may make it attach to the apparatus 1 so that it may move horizontally. Further, the first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the vertical direction.
- the L-shaped third guide 57 in plan view may be divided into a guide that configures the second transport path 52 together with the second guide 56 and a guide that configures the third transport path 53 together with the second guide 56.
- first to third transport paths 51, 52, 53 can be opened by movably attaching the second guide 56 to the apparatus 1 instead of movably attaching the first guide 55 and the third guide 57. It may be.
- the second guide 56 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the front-rear direction. Further, the second guide 56 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the vertical direction.
- the layout of the conveyance path shown above is an example.
- the conveyance path may be arranged in a straight line, for example.
- the shape of the guide is appropriately changed according to the layout of the conveyance path.
- the banknotes B are vertically conveyed while standing. Unlike this, you may comprise a banknote counter so that the banknote B may be conveyed longitudinally or short-sided.
- the apparatus 1 is provided with the reject unit 54 that holds the discharged reject banknote.
- the reject unit 54 includes a branch path 58 and a part of the conveyance path that communicates with the branch path 58.
- the reject unit 54 holds the reject banknote in a state in which a part of the reject banknote protrudes from the reject port 54a.
- the configuration of the reject unit 54 will be described in detail.
- the conveyance path is formed in a U shape in plan view as shown in FIG. Specifically, the second conveyance path 52 is bent from the first conveyance path 51 at the first bent portion 511, and the third conveyance path 53 is bent from the second conveyance path 52 at the second bent portion 521.
- the first bent portion 511 is provided with a first conveying roller 512 as shown in FIG.
- the banknote is conveyed by the first conveyance roller 512 so as to be bent from the first conveyance path 51 to the second conveyance path 52.
- the first transport roller 512 has a plurality of drive rollers 513 arranged in the vertical direction, and a driven roller 514 that sandwiches the bill together with the drive rollers 513.
- the driven rollers 514 are not provided for all the drive rollers 513 but are provided for some of the drive rollers 513.
- This driven roller 513 is provided with two driven rollers 514.
- the driven roller 514 is provided at a position 90 degrees apart around the rotation center of the drive roller 513 so that the bill is bent approximately 90 degrees along the outer periphery of the drive roller 513.
- FIG. 10 shows the driven roller 514 on the upstream side in the conveyance path.
- the second bent portion 521 is provided with a second transport roller 522 as shown in FIG.
- the bill is conveyed by the second conveyance roller 522 so as to be bent from the second conveyance path 52 to the third conveyance path 53.
- the second transport roller 522 has a plurality of driving rollers 523 arranged in the vertical direction, and a driven roller 524 that sandwiches the bill together with the driving rollers 523.
- the driven rollers 524 are not provided in all the drive rollers 523 but are provided in some of the drive rollers 523.
- This driven roller 523 is provided with two driven rollers 524.
- the driven roller 524 is provided at a position 90 degrees apart around the rotation center of the drive roller 523 so that the bill is bent approximately 90 degrees along the outer periphery of the drive roller 523.
- the first transport roller 512 and the second transport roller 522 are configured to be able to switch the rotation direction. That is, the 1st conveyance roller 512 and the 2nd conveyance roller 522 can switch the conveyance direction of a banknote by the forward direction which a banknote goes to the holding
- the branch path 58 branches off from the conveyance path.
- the branch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511 and extends on an extension line of the second transport path 52, that is, in a straight line with the second transport path 52.
- the branch path 58 is formed by the rear end portion of the first guide 55 and the third guide 57.
- the end of the branch path 58 opposite to the branch section from the transport path opens to the right side surface of the rear portion of the apparatus 1 to form a reject port 54a.
- the branch path 58 opens upward similarly to the second transport path 52.
- the branch path 58 constitutes a reject portion 54 together with a part of the transport path (specifically, a part of the second transport path 52).
- the first bent portion 511 is provided with a switching portion 59 that switches the path of the banknote from the conveyance path to the branch path 58.
- FIG. 12 is a plan view of the switching unit 59.
- the switching unit 59 has a plurality of (specifically, four) claws 591 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is formed in a comb-like shape as a whole.
- the claw 591 has a pressing portion 592 and a guide portion 593 and has a wedge shape.
- the pressing portion 592 and the guide portion 593 are connected at the tip of the claw 591.
- the pressing portion 592 has a concave curved shape.
- the guide portion 593 has a shape in which the distal end portion 593a is bent with respect to the proximal end portion 593b.
- the switching unit 59 is supported at the rear end portion of the first guide 55 so as to be rotatable around the rotation axis A extending in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG.
- the switching unit 59 is biased by a biasing spring 594 so that the tip of the claw 591 is positioned on the transport path.
- the switching unit 59 normally contacts a stopper (not shown), so that the tip of the claw 591 is positioned on the conveyance path. This position is referred to as a first position.
- the biasing spring 594 is an example of a biasing member.
- the claw 591 is located on the first bent portion 511 in the conveyance path in the first position.
- the first bent portion 511 is provided with a first transport roller 512.
- the upstream driven roller 514 is disposed between the claws 591.
- the downstream position of the driven roller 514 on the downstream side is also different from the vertical position of the claw 591. Therefore, even if the claw 591 rotates, it does not interfere with the driven roller 514.
- the vertical position of the claw 591 is different from the vertical position of the drive roller 513. Therefore, in the first position, the claw 591 enters between the driving rollers 513 without interfering with the driving roller 513. Thereby, the nail
- the switching unit 59 configured in this way guides the banknote from the first transport path 51 to the second transport path 52 via the first bending section 511, When the bill is transported in the reverse direction, the bill is guided from the second transport path 52 to the branch path 58.
- the switching unit 59 is normally located at the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 594.
- the pressing portion 592 of the claw 591 is located at a position where a bill conveyed from the first conveying path 51 to the first bent portion 511 contacts. Therefore, the banknote conveyed in the forward direction from the first conveyance path 51 abuts on the pressing portion 592 and presses the switching portion 59 against the urging force of the urging spring 594.
- the switching unit 59 pressed by the bill moves to a second position retracted from the conveyance path (specifically, a position where the claw 591 and the driving roller 513 do not overlap in a plan view).
- the pressing portion 592 has a concave curved shape, and is substantially parallel to the outer periphery of the driving roller 513 when the switching portion 59 is located at the second position.
- the pressing unit 592 guides the banknote in the direction along the outer periphery of the driving roller 513. That is, the pressing unit 592 guides the bill so that it is bent from the first transport path 51 toward the second transport path 52.
- the switching unit 59 guides the banknote to the second transport path 52 while allowing the banknote to pass in the forward direction.
- the apparatus 1 is temporarily stopped after the banknote determined to be rejected by the identification unit 3 passes through the second sensor 62 of the second transport path 52 in the forward direction, and is transported in the reverse direction.
- the bill passes through the second sensor 62, the bill always passes through the switching unit 59, so that the switching unit 59 is returned to the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 594. That is, when the reject banknote is conveyed in the reverse direction, the switching unit 59 is located at the first position.
- the guide portion 593 of the claw 591 is located at a position for guiding the bills conveyed in the reverse direction from the second conveyance path 52 to the branch path 58.
- the distal end portion 593a overlaps the driving roller 513 in plan view, while the proximal end portion 593b is connected to the second conveyance path 52. It extends along the extension line. That is, the front end portion 593a is in a state of crossing the conveyance path.
- the guide portion 593 forms a straight conveyance path from the second conveyance path 52 to the branch path 58. Therefore, the banknotes conveyed in the second conveyance path 52 in the reverse direction and sandwiched between the driving roller 513 and the downstream driven roller 514 are guided to the guide unit 593 without being bent toward the first conveyance path 51. Then, it is guided toward the branch path 58.
- the tip portion 593a of the guide portion 593 is located at a position crossing the outer periphery of the driving roller 513, so that the bill comes into contact with the tip portion 593a, Guided along the portion 593a to the base end portion 593b, and further guided to the base end portion 593b and guided toward the branch path 58.
- the conveyance is stopped.
- a part of the reject banknote remains in the second transport path 52. That is, the discharged reject banknote is held by a part of the branch path 58 and the second transport path 52.
- counting of a residual banknote will be restarted.
- the reject unit 54 can be configured by using a part of the transport path, and it is not necessary to provide the reject unit 54 separately from the transport path. Can be formed.
- maintains a rejection banknote in the state where a part of rejection banknote protruded outside from the rejection port 54a, and does not need to accommodate the whole rejection banknote, it can make a rejection part small.
- the device 1 can be formed in a small size.
- a part of the rejected banknote remains in the transport path, and the transport path has an opening 50 that exposes a part of the banknote. A part of the rejected banknote can always be visually confirmed.
- the branch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511 of the transport path. Since the first bent portion 511 is a place where the course of the banknote is changed from the first transport path 51 to the second transport path 52, the path of the banknote is originally transported by connecting the branch path 58 to this place. Easy to switch to road or branch road 58.
- the branch path 58 extends on an extension line of the second transport path 52, when the banknote enters the branch path 58 from the second transport path 52, the banknote is moved in the transport direction in the second transport path 52. If the bill is conveyed as it is, the bill is naturally guided to the branch path 58. That is, the bill can be smoothly guided to the branch path 58.
- the bill when the bill is transported in the forward direction in the transport path, it is retracted to the second position to allow the transport of the bill, and when the bill is transported in the reverse direction in the transport path, the bill is transported to the first position. Since the switching part 59 which guides the banknote to the branch path 58 is provided, the course of the reject banknote is switched from the transport path to the branch path 58 by switching the transport direction of the reject banknote from the forward direction to the reverse direction. Can do. According to this configuration, since a drive source for driving the switching unit 59 is not required, the configuration of the device 1 can be simplified and power consumption can be reduced.
- the guide unit 593 extends along the branch path 58. For this reason, the reject banknote conveyed in the reverse direction and in contact with the guide portion 593 is smoothly guided to the branch path 58.
- the switching unit 59 has a plurality of claws 591 arranged apart from each other and is formed in a comb-teeth shape, the contact area between the bill and the switching unit 59 can be reduced. Resistance when a bill is conveyed can be reduced.
- the branch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511, but the place where the branch path 58 is connected to the transport path is not limited thereto.
- the branch path 58 may be connected to the second bent portion 521.
- the branch path 58 may be connected to a portion that extends linearly, such as the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, or the third transport path 53. Further, the branch path 58 may extend on an extension line of the first transport path 51.
- the apparatus 1 is configured to guide the reject banknote to the branch path 58 by switching the transport direction of the reject banknote from the forward direction to the reverse direction, but is not limited thereto.
- the configuration may be such that the path of the reject banknote is switched from the transport path to the branch path 58 while the reject banknote is transported in the forward direction.
- the path of the reject banknote can be switched between the transport path and the branch path 58 by driving a member that switches the path such as the switching unit 59 by a solenoid actuator or the like.
- FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the set unit 2.
- FIG. 15 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the set state as viewed from above.
- FIG. 16 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the set state as viewed from the front.
- FIG. 17 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the extended state as viewed from above.
- the setting unit 2 includes an opening 21 into which banknotes are inserted (see FIGS. 1 to 3), a partition plate 13 on which the set banknotes are placed, a feeding belt 22 for feeding out the set banknotes, and a set of banknotes A guard part 23 for preventing contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22 at the time, a pressing part 24 for pressing the banknote against the feeding belt 22 when the banknote is fed, various rollers, and a motor 26 for driving the feeding belt 22 Have.
- the set unit 2 is in a set state when a bill is set in the set unit 2, and is in a payout state when the set bill is paid out. The set state and the extended state will be described later.
- the opening 21 is formed by the first guide 55 and the second guide 56 and is disposed on the right side of the front portion of the apparatus 1.
- the opening 21 is a portion formed by the edge of the first guide 55 and the edge of the second guide 56, in other words, the opening edge.
- the opening 21 opens upward and forward of the device 1.
- the upper part of the device 1 corresponds to one side in the width direction of the feeding belt 22 described later in detail. That is, the opening 21 opens on one side in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the front of the apparatus 1 corresponds to the side opposite to the direction in which bills are fed out of the bill feeding directions by the feeding belt 22.
- the opening 21 is also open on the opposite side to the direction in which the banknote is fed out of the banknote feeding direction by the feeding belt 22. Therefore, the banknote is inserted into the set unit 2 from the top to the bottom or from the front to the back through the opening 21.
- the partition plate 13, the feeding belt 22, the guard portion 23, the pressing portion 24, various rollers, and the motor 26 are disposed on the inner side of the opening portion 21.
- the feeding belt 22 is an annular endless belt.
- the outer peripheral surface of the feeding belt 22 is referred to as “front surface 221”, and the inner peripheral surface is referred to as “back surface 222”.
- a direction orthogonal to both the thickness direction and the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the feeding belt 22 is referred to as a “width direction”.
- a plurality of teeth (not shown) extending in the width direction are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction on the front surface 221 and the back surface 222 of the feeding belt 22.
- the front teeth and the back teeth have the same shape and are arranged at the same position.
- the same tooth as the tooth on the front surface 221 is provided on the back surface 222 of the portion of the feeding belt 22 where the tooth is provided on the front surface 221.
- the feeding belt 22 is disposed on the partition plate 13 in a state where the width direction thereof matches the normal direction of the partition plate 13.
- the various rollers include at least a driving roller 251, a driven roller 252, a gate roller 253, a guide roller 36, and a separation roller 37. These rollers are arranged on the same side as the feeding belt 22 with respect to the partition plate 13.
- the driving roller 251 is rotationally driven by the motor 26.
- the motor 26 is disposed on the side opposite to the feeding belt 22 with the partition plate 13 interposed therebetween.
- the feeding belt 22 is wound around the driving roller 251 and the driven roller 252.
- a plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the feeding belt 22 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the drive roller 251.
- a plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the feeding belt 22 are also provided on the outer peripheral surface of the driven roller 252.
- the guide roller 36 and the separation roller 37 are disposed outside the feeding belt 22.
- the gate roller 253 is disposed inside the feeding belt 22. In a state where no bill is present, the feeding belt 22 is sandwiched between the driving roller 251 and the guide roller 36, and the feeding belt 22 is sandwiched between the gate roller 253 and the separation roller 37.
- the guide roller 36 is driven to rotate in the direction of feeding out banknotes. That is, the guide roller 36 rotates clockwise in FIG.
- the guide roller 36 and the feeding belt 22 feed the banknotes between them.
- the separation roller 37 is located upstream of the guide roller 36 in the feeding direction.
- the separation roller 37 is rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the bill feeding direction. That is, the separation roller 37 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. Even if a plurality of banknotes are about to be fed out by the feeding belt 22, the feeding of the banknotes other than the banknotes in contact with the feeding belt 22 is prevented by the rotation of the separation roller 37 in the opposite direction.
- the guard part 23 has a first guard part 231, a second guard part 232, and a drive shaft 233 to which the first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 are connected.
- the guard unit 23 is configured to be switchable between a guard state that prevents contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22 and a retracted state that enables contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22.
- the guard unit 23 is in the guard state, while when the set unit 2 is in the extended state, the guard unit 23 is in the retracted state.
- the first guard portion 231 faces the first side surface 223 closer to the opening 21 (that is, farther from the partition plate 13) among the side surfaces of the feeding belt 22 in the guard state.
- the first guard portion 231 protrudes from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the second guard portion 232 faces the second side surface 224 that is farther from the opening 21 (that is, closer to the partition plate 13) among the side surfaces of the feeding belt 22 in the guard state.
- the second guard portion 232 protrudes from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the first guard portion 231 has a first inclined surface 234 that is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it approaches the first side surface 223 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the second guard portion 232 has a second inclined surface 235 that is inclined so as to be separated from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it is separated from the second side surface 224 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the first inclined surface 234 and the second inclined surface 235 are inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as the depth of the setting portion 2 increases in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 are connected to the drive shaft 233.
- the drive shaft 233 extends in the normal direction of the partition plate 13 and is rotatably supported by the partition plate 13.
- the drive shaft 233 is rotationally driven by a motor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the partition plate 13.
- the guard unit 23 is switched between a guard state and a retracted state when the drive shaft 233 is rotationally driven.
- the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 protrude from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 are retracted to a position retracted from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22. That is, when viewed in the vertical direction, the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22 is hidden by the first guard portion 231 in the guard state, whereas the second side surface 224 of the feeding belt 22 is in the retracted state. Is exposed.
- the pressing portion 24 has a main body portion 240, a first contact portion 241, a second contact portion 242, and a drive shaft 243.
- the main body 240 has a generally plate shape.
- the main body 240 is arranged at a position facing the feeding belt 22.
- the first contact part 241 and the second contact part 242 are provided so as to protrude from the main body part 240 on the surface of the main body part 240 that faces the feeding belt 22.
- the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are arranged in the vertical direction. In the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22, the first contact portion 241 and the first guard portion 231 face each other, and the second contact portion 242 and the second guard portion 232 face each other.
- the first abutting portion 241 has a third inclined surface 244 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes to the back of the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
- the second contact portion 242 has a fourth inclined surface 245 that is inclined so as to be away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing.
- the main body 240 is connected to the drive shaft 243.
- the drive shaft 243 extends in the normal direction of the partition plate 13 and is rotatably supported by the partition plate 13.
- the drive shaft 243 is rotationally driven by a motor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the partition plate 13.
- the state of the presser 24 is switched between the retracted state and the presser state when the drive shaft 243 is rotationally driven.
- the presser part 24 is interlocked with the guard part 23. When the guard part 23 is in the guard state, the presser part 24 is in the retracted state, and when the guard part 23 is in the retracted state, the presser part 24 is in the presser state. .
- the presser unit 24 is in the retracted state, while when the set unit 2 is in the extended state, the presser unit 24 is in the presser state.
- the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are located at positions sufficiently away from the feeding belt 22. In the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22, a sufficient interval is secured between the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 and the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232.
- the first abutting portion 241 and the second abutting portion 242 abut against the bill and press the bill against the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22.
- the guard portion 23 is retracted in conjunction with the presser portion 24, so that the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 interfere with the guard portion 23. Without touching the banknote.
- the operation of the setting unit 2 will be described.
- the guard unit 23 is in the guard state, and the presser unit 24 is in the retracted state. Therefore, when the set unit 2 is viewed from above through the opening 21, the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22 is covered with the first guard unit 231 and is not exposed. Therefore, even if it is a case where a banknote is inserted from the upper direction through the opening part 21, ie, the width direction of the feeding belt 22, a banknote is not caught on the 1st side 223 of the feeding belt 22, and a banknote is set. 2 can be inserted smoothly.
- the presser portion 24 is disposed at a position having a sufficient interval between the presser portion 24 and the guard portion 23. Therefore, the banknote can be smoothly inserted into the set unit 2 without contacting the guard unit 23 or the presser unit 24.
- the first guard part 231 has the first inclined surface 234.
- the first inclined surface 234 is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. Therefore, even if a banknote contacts the 1st guard part 231, a banknote is guided by the 1st inclined surface 234 so that it may leave
- a second guard portion 232 is provided at a position facing the second side surface 224 of the feeding belt 22, and the second guard portion 232 protrudes from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22. Therefore, the second guard portion 232 prevents the bill from contacting the payout belt 22 even at the back of the set portion 2.
- the second guard portion 232 has a second inclined surface 235 that is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper in the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. . Therefore, even if the banknote contacts the second guard part 232, the banknote is guided by the second inclined surface 235 so as to move away from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set part 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2.
- the banknote contacts the holding part 24.
- the first contact portion 241 has a third inclined surface 244 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing. For this reason, even if the bill comes into contact with the first contact portion 241, the bill is guided by the third inclined surface 244 so as to move away from the main body portion 240 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2.
- the second contact portion 242 has a fourth inclined surface 245 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes to the back of the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing. Therefore, even if a bill comes into contact with the second contact portion 242, the bill is guided by the fourth inclined surface 245 so as to move away from the main body portion 240 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2.
- the guard unit 23 is in the retracted state, and the presser unit 24 is in the presser state.
- the guard portion 23 is in the retracted state, the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 can be brought into contact with the banknote, and the banknote is pressed against the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 when the pressing portion 24 is in the pressing state. .
- the bills are appropriately fed out by the feeding belt 22 as the bills come into contact with the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22.
- the bill can be smoothly guided toward the back of the set portion 2 even if the bill contacts the first guard portion 231. .
- the second guard part 232 it is possible to prevent the bills from coming into contact with the feeding belt 22 even at the back of the set part 2. Furthermore, by providing the second inclined surface 235 on the second guard part 232, the banknote can be smoothly guided further toward the back of the set part 2 even if the banknote contacts the second guard part 232.
- the 3rd inclined surface 244 is provided in the 1st contact part 241. Even if the bill comes into contact with the first abutment portion 241 or the second abutment portion 242 by providing the fourth inclined surface 245 on the second abutment portion 242, the bill is moved toward the back of the set portion 2. He can guide you smoothly.
- the banknote can be smoothly inserted.
- a banknote can be inserted in the set part 2 from the direction different from a pay-out direction.
- the banknote can be inserted into the set unit 2 from the feeding direction.
- the first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 in the guard state are in a state of projecting from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22, so that the set unit 2 does not come into contact with the surface 221. Can be inserted into.
- the set part 2 has the guard part 23, you may abbreviate
- FIG. although the guard part 23 has the 1st guard part 231 and the 2nd guard part 232, you may abbreviate
- the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 are provided with a first inclined surface 234 and a second inclined surface 235, respectively. At least one of the first inclined surface 234 and the second inclined surface 235 is provided. It may be omitted.
- the presser part 24 may be omitted.
- the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 of the presser portion 24 may be omitted, and the bill may be pressed against the feeding belt 22 by the main body portion 240. Further, any one of the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 may be omitted.
- the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are provided with a third inclined surface 244 and a fourth inclined surface 245, respectively. At least the third inclined surface 244 and the fourth inclined surface 245 are provided. One may be omitted.
- the opening 21 opens upward and forward, but may be configured to open only upward. In that case, the opening 21 is formed larger than the inserted bill.
- the feeding belt 22 that is wound between the driving roller 251 and the driven roller 252 may be switched between the standby state and the operating state.
- . 18 and 19 show the setting unit 2 in which the feeding belt 22 is configured to switch between a standby state and an operating state.
- the driving roller 251, the driven roller 252, and the gate roller 253 are each attached to the frame 27.
- the driven roller 252 and the gate roller 253 are rotatably supported with respect to the frame 27.
- the drive roller 251 is fixed to the output shaft 261 of the motor 26 as shown in FIG. When the motor 26 operates, the drive roller 251 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 18 via the output shaft 261. Along with this, the feeding belt 22 supported by the frame 27 also rotates counterclockwise.
- a gear 262 that rotates integrally with the output shaft 261 is attached to the output shaft 261.
- a torque limiter is interposed between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262. The torque limiter limits the torque transmission between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined maximum torque.
- the frame 27 is supported so as to rotate around the output shaft 261.
- An engaging portion 271 is fixed to the lower portion of the frame 27.
- the engaging portion 271 meshes with the gear 262.
- the engaging portion 271 is configured by a part of the gear (that is, a gear cut out in a fan shape) that is parallel to the gear 262 and meshes with the gear 262.
- the engaging portion 271 transmits the torque to the frame 27, so that the frame 27 rotates about the output shaft 261.
- the frame 27 is urged clockwise around the output shaft 261 by an urging member (for example, a spring) (not shown). Has been.
- the feeding belt 22 supported by the frame 27 is located on the left side of the device 1 with respect to the edge of the opening 21 when the set unit 2 is viewed from above.
- the feeding belt 22 is in a standby state. Even when the banknote is inserted from above through the opening 21, that is, in the width direction of the feeding belt 22, the banknote is not caught on the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22, and the banknote is inserted into the setting section 2. Can be inserted smoothly.
- the motor 26 When the bill B is fed out after the bill B is set in the setting unit 2, the motor 26 operates. As a result, the output shaft 261 rotates counterclockwise. Along with this, torque is transmitted to the frame 27 through the gear 262 and the engaging portion 271. The frame 27 urged clockwise by the urging member rotates about the output shaft 261 in the counterclockwise direction. As shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 18, the feeding belt 22 moves to the right side of the device 1 from the edge of the opening 21. The feeding belt 22 sandwiches the bill B together with the presser portion 24 in the pressed state. In this way, the feeding belt 22 enters an operating state. As the operation of the motor 26 continues, the bill B is fed out by the feeding belt 22.
- the torque transmitted between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262 by the torque limiter is limited to a predetermined maximum torque. This prevents the frame 27 from rotating further in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the banknote B can be fed out while maintaining the feeding belt 22 in the operating state.
- the bill B can be smoothly inserted into the set portion 2 through the opening 21 as in the case of the set portion 2 having the above-described configuration.
- FIG. 20 shows the configuration of the holding unit 4.
- the holding unit 4 includes a stopper 41 and a bill holder 43.
- the stopper 41 hits the leading edge in the transport direction of the bill B transported forward from the apparatus 1 from the third transport path 53 to the holding unit 4 and fulfills the function of aligning the leading edge of the bill B.
- the stopper 41 is attached so as to protrude from the left side surface of the second guide 56 to the left outward of the device 1.
- the stopper 41 is disposed so as to cross in the left-right direction in the holding portion 4 spreading in the front-rear direction.
- the stopper 41 is attached to the 2nd guide 56 so that the arrangement position of the front-back direction can be changed (refer the arrow of FIG. 20).
- the arrangement position of the stopper 41 can be changed in accordance with the size of the bill B to be counted (particularly the length in the longitudinal direction).
- the stopper 41 is also attached to the second guide 56 so that its base end portion can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction.
- the stopper 41 rotates from the side surface of the second guide 56 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the left side surface of the second guide 56, and then rotates toward the front of the device 1 so as to follow the left side surface of the second guide 56. It is possible to change to a state where it falls over.
- a torsion spring 42 is attached to the base end portion of the stopper 41, and the torsion spring 42 urges the stopper 41 in the clockwise direction in FIG.
- the stopper 41 is in a state of protruding from the side surface of the second guide 56, and functions to align the leading edges of the bills B conveyed to the holding unit 4.
- the stopper 41 is pushed by the banknote B and can rotate.
- the stopper 41 is retracted, the banknote B can be easily taken out from the holding portion 4.
- the holding unit 4 holds the banknote B in an upright state, but the banknote B moves in the horizontal direction (particularly the left side of the apparatus 1) when the leading edge of the banknote B enters the groove provided in the stopper 41. It is prevented.
- the holding unit 4 can hold a plurality of banknotes at a time in a state where they are arranged in the horizontal direction. The bills B are prevented from falling apart.
- the bill holder 43 functions to hold the bill B in a standing state by pressing the front or back surface of the bill B held by the holding unit 4.
- the bill holder 43 also has a function of pressing and stacking a plurality of banknotes B held by the holding unit 4 in the thickness direction.
- the bill holder 43 is attached to the third guide 57.
- the bill holder 43 is attached to a front end portion of a third guide 57 configured in an L shape in a plan view, and extends from there to the front of the device 1.
- the bill holder 43 is attached to the third guide 57 so that its base end portion can rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction.
- the bill holder 43 can rotate in the clockwise direction in FIG.
- a torsion spring 44 is attached to the base end portion of the bill holder 43, and the torsion spring 44 biases the tag holder 43 in the counterclockwise direction in FIG.
- the left side surface of the second guide 56 in the holding unit 4 is located on the right side of the apparatus 1 with respect to the third conveyance path 53.
- maintenance part 4 moves ahead, moving to the right side of the apparatus 1, as shown with a dashed-dotted line in FIG.
- the bill holder 43 guides the banknote B so that the banknote B transported from the third transport path 53 to the holding unit 4 is brought closer to the side surface of the second guide 56.
- the bill holder 43, together with the stopper 41, causes the bill B to be held at a predetermined position in the holding unit 4.
- the bill holder 43 biased counterclockwise rotates in the horizontal direction in the holding unit 4 by rotating clockwise.
- the outermost banknote B hits the front or back surface of the outermost banknote B, and holds the plurality of banknotes B toward the side surface of the second guide 56. In this way, a plurality of banknotes B can be stably held in an upright state.
- the bill holder 43 When removing the bill B from the holding part 4, the bill holder 43 is pushed by the bill B and can be rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the bill holder 43 is retracted, so that the bill B can be easily taken out from the holding unit 4.
- the apparatus 1 includes first and second displays 81 and 82, and information related to the counting process is displayed on the first and second displays 81 and 82. Therefore, the person in charge (or the customer) sees the display contents of the first and second displays 81 and 82 to start the counting result, indicate that an error has occurred during the counting process, that a reject banknote has occurred, and the like. Can be recognized. However, it can be recognized without having to look at the display contents of the first and second displays 81 and 82 that the counting process has ended normally, an error has occurred during the counting process, a rejected banknote has occurred, and the like. By doing so, the convenience of the device 1 is improved.
- the holding unit 4 is provided with a light-up structure, and the holding unit 4 indicates that the counting process has ended normally, an error has occurred during the counting process, and a reject banknote has been generated. It is configured as shown by the color of the light radiated.
- the light-up structure includes an LED substrate 45 having LEDs and a mirror 46 that reflects light emitted from the LED substrate 45.
- the LED substrate 45 is disposed inside the third guide 57 and is configured to emit light toward the front of the apparatus 1.
- the LED substrate 45 is configured to be capable of emitting light of at least three colors of blue, red, and yellow.
- the mirror 46 is disposed in front of the LED substrate 45 inside the third guide 57.
- the mirror 46 is disposed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the bill holder 43 attached to the third guide 57.
- the mirror 46 is disposed at a predetermined angle with respect to the LED substrate 45 so as to reflect light emitted from the LED substrate 45 obliquely forward.
- the bill holder 54 is made of a translucent material, and the light reflected by the mirror 46 passes through the inside of the tag holder 54 and is irradiated on the left side surface of the second guide 56 in the holding unit 4. .
- the light passes through the inside of the bill holder 54, the light is scattered, so that the entire holding unit 4 is lit up.
- the control unit 6 changes the color to light up the holding unit 4 according to the state of the bill counting process. Specifically, when the bill counting process is normally completed, the holding unit 4 is lit up with blue light so that the LED substrate 45 emits blue light. The person in charge can instantly recognize that the counting process has been completed normally by seeing that the holding unit 4 is lit up in blue. Therefore, it is possible to check the counting result by looking at the first or second display 81 or 82 and to quickly remove the bill B from the holding unit 4. In this way, the efficiency of the counting process can be improved.
- the control unit 6 also illuminates the holding unit 4 with yellow light so that yellow light is emitted from the LED substrate 45 when a reject bill is generated during the bill counting process.
- the apparatus 1 stops with the reject banknote protruding from the reject port 54a, but the person in charge confirms that the holding unit 4 is lit up in yellow.
- the person in charge can quickly take out the banknote B from the reject unit 54 and can quickly restart the counting process.
- the control unit 6 further holds the LED board 45 so that red light is emitted from the LED board 45 when an error occurs, for example, the banknote B is clogged during the counting process. Light up part 4 with red light. The person in charge can recognize that the error has occurred and the apparatus 1 is stopped instantaneously when the holding unit 4 is lit up in red. Therefore, the person in charge can immediately start releasing the error.
- the holding unit 4 is a place where the bill B is held at the end of the counting process, the person in charge (and the customer) can easily see the holding unit 4. Lighting up the holding unit 4 is effective for promptly informing the person in charge of the state of the apparatus 1.
- the place where the light-up is performed in the apparatus 1 is not limited to the holding unit 4.
- the set unit 2 may be lit up.
- a light-up structure may be provided in the reject unit 54, and when a reject banknote is generated, the reject unit 54 may be lighted up by the light-up structure of the reject unit 54. By doing so, it becomes possible for the person in charge to directly recognize that the rejection of the reject banknote is necessary.
- a plurality of LEDs may be embedded along the conveyance path of the conveyance unit 5. In this structure, you may make it light up LED sequentially according to conveyance of the banknote B. FIG. Further, when the banknote B is jammed in the transport path, the LED at the location where the jam has occurred may be turned on.
- the light-up may also be performed in the standby state of the apparatus 1.
- the standby state of the apparatus 1 that the counting process can be executed may be notified by the color of light up.
- the counting process of the device may be lit up by flashing, for example, to indicate that it is being processed.
- the LED substrate 45 for illuminating the holding unit 4 may be embedded in the side surface of the second guide 56 instead of being disposed inside the third guide 57.
- the set unit 2 is arranged on the front right side of the device 1 (that is, the main body). On the left side of the front part of the device 1, a holding part 4 is arranged. Both the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4 are provided in the upper part 11 of the apparatus 1. The set part 2 and the holding part 4 are positioned side by side in the horizontal direction at the front part of the apparatus 1.
- the lower part 12 of the apparatus 1 has a substantially rectangular outer shape whose front and rear length is longer than the length in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG.
- the connector 7 is provided on the front side when the lower part 12 is divided into two equal parts, the front side and the rear side. Therefore, the connector 7 is disposed at the front portion of the device 1 in the same manner as the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4.
- the connector 7 is provided on the front surface of the lower part 12.
- the connector 7 is configured to connect a power cord, a USB cable, a LAN cable, and an RS232C cable.
- the electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 is disposed so as to extend forward from the front surface of the device 1.
- 1st display 81 is attached to the upper part of connector 7 in the front part of device 1, as shown virtually in Drawing 1 and Drawing 23.
- the first display 81 has a liquid crystal panel, for example.
- the upper end of the first display 81 is attached between the set unit 2 and the holding unit 4 and the connector 7 on the front surface of the device 1.
- the first display 81 is inclined obliquely downward and forward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end.
- the connector 7 is covered from above by the first display 81.
- the connector 7 is hidden by the first display 81.
- the device 1 is placed, for example, near the upper edge of the table 70 with the front portion of the device 1 facing the person in charge.
- the electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 can be extended forward from the front surface of the device 1.
- the electric wire 71 can be extended downward from the edge of the table 70 as it is.
- the electric wire 71 can be extended toward the person in charge and placed on the table. . As a result, the electric wire 71 does not get in the way on the desktop.
- the electric wire 71 can be easily attached to and detached from the connector 7.
- the connector 7 can be hidden by the first display 81.
- the 1st display 81 is attached between the set part 2 and the holding
- the first display 81 does not get in the way when the bills are taken out from 4.
- the connector 7 is provided on the front surface of the lower portion 12 in the apparatus 1.
- the connector 7 may be provided on the front side of the left side surface of the lower portion 12 or on the front side of the right side surface. You may make it provide.
- the electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 does not get in the way on the desktop.
- both the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4 are provided in the front part of the apparatus 1.
- the setting unit 2 may be provided at the front part of the device 1 and the holding unit 4 may be provided at the rear part of the device 1.
- the connector 7 it is desirable to provide the connector 7 at the front part of the device 1 provided with the set part 2.
- the holding unit 4 may be provided at the front part of the device 1 and the set unit 2 may be provided at the rear part of the device 1. In this configuration, it is desirable to provide the connector 7 at the front of the device 1 provided with the holding unit 4.
- the device 1 includes a plurality of displays 81 and 82 on which at least the counting result of banknotes is displayed.
- the first display 81 is mainly a display for the person in charge to see
- the second display 82 is mainly a display for the customer to see, so that both the person in charge and the customer can count the bill counting results. It can be easily confirmed.
- Each of the plurality of displays is preferably 4 inches or more, for example.
- FIG. 24 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the place where the second display 82 is attached.
- the second display 82 that is one of the plurality of displays is attached to the apparatus 1 via a display support portion 83.
- the display support portion 83 includes a support shaft 84 that extends in the vertical direction and a mount portion 85 that fixes the second display 82 to the support shaft 84.
- the display support unit 83 is installed in a mechanism 86 provided in the apparatus 1.
- the mechanism 86 is configured such that the support shaft 84 is inserted.
- the support shaft 84 is configured to be expandable and contractable within a predetermined range in the axial direction, that is, the vertical direction, and is configured to be rotatable around the axis. Thereby, the height of the second display 82 can be freely adjusted, and the direction of the second display 82 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) can be freely adjusted.
- the mount portion 85 is configured to be capable of adjusting the mounting angle of the second display 82 with respect to the support shaft 84. Thereby, the direction of the 2nd display 82 in an up-down direction can be adjusted freely. That is, the display support portion 83 is configured to be able to adjust the height and the orientation in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the second display 82.
- the configuration of the display support portion 83 is not limited to that shown here, and any configuration can be used as long as the display can be adjusted in height and in the vertical and horizontal directions. It doesn't matter.
- only one mechanism 86 capable of installing the display support portion 83 is provided at the rear right corner of the apparatus 1, but a plurality of mechanisms capable of installing the display support portion 83 are provided. It may be provided. And the attachment position of the 2nd display 82 can be easily changed by selecting the mechanism which installs the display support part 83 from these several mechanisms.
- FIG. 25 is a plan view showing another configuration of the bill counting apparatus.
- mechanisms 86 a, 86 b and 86 c on which the display support portion 83 can be installed are provided.
- the mechanism 86a is provided at the rear left corner of the apparatus 1, the mechanism 86b is provided in front of the left side, and the mechanism 86c is provided in front of the right side.
- the attachment position of the second display 82 can be easily changed by selecting a mechanism for installing the display support portion 83 from among the mechanisms 86, 86a, 86b, 86c.
- the apparatus 1 may be configured such that a first display 81, which is one of a plurality of displays, can be attached to and detached from the main body.
- a first display 81 which is one of a plurality of displays
- support pieces 87a and 87b fixed by a torque hinge are provided at the rear part of the device 1
- claw portions 88a and 88b provided on the back surface of the first display 81 are hooked and fixed to the support pieces 87a and 87b.
- the configuration When the first display 81 is removed from the device 1, the support pieces 87 a and 87 b are preferably removable from the device 1. Further, the claw portions 88a and 88b are preferably configured to be detachable from the first display 81. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG.
- the first display 81 needs to be operable even when it is detached from the main body of the apparatus 1. Therefore, for example, a rechargeable battery may be built in the first display 81 as a power source, or the first display 81 may be connected to the main body of the apparatus 1 with a power line. Moreover, what is necessary is just to make the 1st display 81 communicable with the apparatus 1 main body by radio
- the first display 81 can be easily attached to and detached from the apparatus 1 main body. Accordingly, since the person in charge can perform, for example, a touch panel operation with the first display 81 removed from the main body of the apparatus 1, the operability of the person in charge is improved. Moreover, since the support pieces 87a and 87b are being fixed to the apparatus 1 with the torque hinge, when the 1st display 81 is attached, the angle in an up-down direction can be adjusted freely. In addition, the structure which attaches a display is not restricted to what was shown here, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a display is removable to a main body. The first display 81 may be fixed to the device 1 with screws.
- the structure of the banknote counting apparatus 1 mentioned above is an example to the last, and the structure of the banknote counting apparatus provided with the some display is not restricted to what was demonstrated here.
- the installation position of the display, whether it is a touch panel or not, or whether it is for a person in charge or for a customer is not limited to that disclosed here.
- the device configuration including two displays has been described here, a device configuration including three or more displays may be used.
- the device 1 is installed in a game hall where a game using chips is performed. And the apparatus 1 is comprised so that the combination of the chip
- FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the display of the chip replacement pattern in the apparatus 1. A configuration that is not directly related to the display of the chip replacement pattern is not shown.
- the apparatus 1 includes an operation input unit 66 that receives an operation input by a user such as a person in charge, a communication control unit 67 that controls communication with the outside, and a screen display unit (in this embodiment, A screen control unit 68 for controlling display contents of the first display 81 and the second display 82).
- the operation input unit 66 is realized by a touch panel provided on the first display 81 that is a screen display unit for a person in charge.
- the present invention is not limited to this.
- the communication control unit 67 and the screen control unit 68 are realized as one function of the control unit 6 described above, and are realized by, for example, a combination of a microcomputer and a program.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and may be realized by a system LSI or the like independent of the control unit 6.
- the apparatus 1 is connected so that it can communicate with the high-order server 100 which manages the game hall centrally via the connector 7, for example.
- the communication control unit 67 receives information serving as a condition for generating a chip exchange pattern from the upper server 100 and sends it to the screen control unit 68.
- the conditions for generating the chip exchange pattern are, for example, the minimum and maximum values of the usage unit amount in the game using the chip, denomination information indicating the type of the chip amount, and the like.
- the host server 100 transmits to the device 1 information that serves as a condition for generating a chip replacement pattern in the table on which the device 1 is placed before the game hall starts business. For example, here, information such as a minimum value $ 25, a maximum value $ 1000, and a chip denomination $ 25, $ 50, $ 100 is transmitted to the apparatus 1.
- the screen control unit 68 When the device 1 counts banknotes, the screen control unit 68 generates a chip exchange pattern corresponding to the count value and displays it on the first display 81 and the second display 82.
- the generation of the chip exchange pattern is automatically performed based on the information transmitted in advance from the upper server 100.
- the arithmetic processing at this time can be executed by, for example, a known exchange algorithm.
- the chip exchange pattern displayed on the screen may be a plurality of types or a single type.
- the screen control unit 68 has a candidate display mode for displaying a plurality of types of chip replacement patterns together on the screen.
- the display of the chip replacement pattern is executed, for example, at the timing when the operation input unit 66 is operated.
- the communication control unit 67 transmits information on the denomination and number of the exchanged bills to the upper server 100. Thereby, the game hall can easily manage the deposit information.
- 28A to 28C are examples of screen display. 28A to 28C are assumed to be displayed on the first display 81. Although the same display is made on the second display 82 which is a display screen for customers, the touch panel is not provided on the second display 82, so no touch button is displayed.
- FIG. 28A is an example of a screen display when banknotes are counted, and “$ 800” is displayed as the count value D1.
- D2 is a currency display, and in the figure, the currency code “HKD” of Hong Kong dollar is displayed.
- D3 is an approval button. When the counting result is approved by the customer, the person in charge presses (touches) the approval button D3 to switch to the display screen of the chip exchange pattern.
- FIG. 28B shows an example of a chip exchange pattern display screen, in which plural types (four types in the figure) of chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 are displayed. That is, FIG. 28B is an example of the candidate display mode described above. Since various chip exchange patterns exist, a characteristic chip exchange pattern can be generated by giving a predetermined constraint condition to the generation algorithm.
- the chip replacement pattern C1 is given a constraint that “use only the minimum amount of chips”. As a result, a chip replacement pattern C1 including only $ 25 chips, which is the minimum amount here, is generated.
- the chip replacement pattern C2 is provided with the constraint that “only two types of small chips are used” & “the variation in the total amount of money for each chip is minimum”. As a result, a chip exchange pattern C2 is generated that includes chips of $ 25 and $ 50, and the total amount for each chip is $ 400.
- the chip replacement pattern C3 is provided with a constraint condition of “use all replaceable chips” & “prioritize small amount chips”. As a result, a chip exchange pattern C3 of 1 $ 100 chip, 2 $ 50 chips, and 24 $ 25 chips is generated.
- the chip replacement pattern C4 is provided with a constraint that “use all replaceable chips” & “the variation in the total amount of money for each chip is a predetermined value or less”. As a result, a relatively well-balanced chip exchange pattern C4 of three $ 100 chips, five $ 50 chips, and ten $ 25 chips is generated.
- FIG. 28C is an example of a display screen of the selected chip replacement pattern, and shows a case where the chip replacement pattern C4 is selected from the screen of FIG. 28B.
- the chip replacement pattern C4 is displayed alone on the screen.
- illustrations imitating real chips are used to make it intuitive and easy to understand.
- each chip may be displayed in accordance with the actual color of the chip.
- FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the apparatus 1 and the person in charge operating it from the bill counting to the chip exchange.
- a person in charge receives a banknote from a customer seeking chip replacement (S11)
- the person in charge sets the banknote in the setting unit 2 of the apparatus 1 and executes counting (S12).
- the device 1 displays the counting result on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S13).
- the screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28A, for example.
- the person in charge puts the counted banknote into, for example, a collection box installed in the amusement hall, and approves the counting result (S14).
- the approval is performed, for example, by touching the approval button D3 on the screen of FIG. 28A.
- the device 1 displays the chip replacement pattern on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S15).
- the screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28B, for example.
- the customer looks at the second display 82 which is a display screen for the customer and tells the person in charge the desired chip replacement pattern.
- the person in charge selects a chip replacement pattern according to the customer's instruction (S16).
- the person in charge touches the position of the chip replacement pattern notified by the customer on the first display 81 which is a display screen for the person in charge.
- the apparatus 1 displays the selected chip replacement pattern on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S17).
- the screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28C, for example.
- the person in charge delivers the chip to the customer according to the displayed chip replacement pattern (S18). If a fraction is given to the count value at the time of chip exchange, the amount of the fraction may be displayed on the screen together with the chip exchange pattern so that the amount is returned when the chip is delivered to the customer.
- the first and second displays 81 and 82 for displaying the count value of the banknote can be exchanged for the amount of money represented by the count value D1 of the banknote under the control of the screen control unit 68.
- Chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 indicating the combination of chips can be displayed. For this reason, when the apparatus 1 is installed, for example, in a game arcade where a game using chips is performed, the person in charge of the game can quickly and accurately perform the exchange operation of bills and chips.
- the chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 are generated using the minimum and maximum values of the usage unit amount in the game and the denomination information indicating the type of the amount of the chip, the device 1 can be used according to the situation. Accurate chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 can be displayed.
- a plurality of types of chip replacement patterns are displayed on the screen (candidate display mode), and the customer selects one of the chip replacement patterns.
- the present disclosure is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done.
- the control may be performed such that one type of chip replacement pattern is first displayed on the screen, and if the customer does not like the chip replacement pattern, the next chip replacement pattern is displayed on the screen.
- the chip replacement pattern selected in the candidate display mode is again displayed alone as shown in FIG. 28C, but the present disclosure is not limited to this.
- the selected chip replacement pattern C4 may be highlighted and displayed on the candidate display mode screen.
- a mode of emphasis as shown in FIG. 30, enlargement, edging, highlighting, and various other things can be considered.
- constraint conditions for generating the chip exchange pattern are not limited to those described above, and various other conditions can be considered. For example, there are constrained conditions such as limiting the upper limit number of chips, giving priority to expensive chips, and avoiding specific chips. Further, these constraint conditions may be transmitted from the upper server 100. For example, the constraint condition may be transmitted before the start of business, or the priority order of the constraint condition may be changed according to the customer.
- the apparatus 1 has two screen display parts, the first and second displays 81 and 82, and the chip exchange pattern is displayed on each screen display part. It is not limited to.
- the number of screen display units may be one, or three or more.
- the chip replacement pattern may be displayed only on a part of the screen display units.
- Display mode for currency identification information and count values are examples of display screens showing both currency identification information and banknote count values.
- a currency code is displayed on the screen as an example of currency identification information.
- “HKD” is the currency code of Hong Kong dollar.
- the bill count value VL is displayed at the center of the screen, and the currency identification information CI1 is displayed small at the upper left of the screen.
- the currency identification information CI2 is displayed large on the left hand of the screen.
- the screen control unit 68 has a display mode (first mode) showing a screen as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 31A as a display mode for currency identification information and banknote count values, and the display mode for currency identification information is first.
- This mode is different from the mode and has a screen (second mode) as shown in FIG. 31B. That is, in the second mode, the currency identification information CI2 is displayed with more emphasis compared to the first mode.
- the screen control unit 68 can switch the display mode of the currency identification information and the bill count value according to the operation state of the apparatus 1.
- the first mode (FIG. 31A) is used so that the count value of the banknote is easier to see
- the second mode (FIG. 31B) is used so that the currency type to be counted is easier to understand.
- FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the screen display according to the operating state of the apparatus 1. 32 is assumed to be displayed on the first display 81. Although the same display is made on the second display 82 which is a display screen for customers, the touch panel is not provided on the second display 82, so no touch button is displayed.
- FIG. 32A shows an example of a screen when the apparatus 1 is on standby.
- the screen control unit 68 uses the second mode, and currency identification information is displayed large.
- the person in charge changes the currency type via the operation input unit 66 (here, the touch panel of the first display 81)
- the content of the currency identification information changes.
- “MOP” is the currency code of Macau Pataca.
- the person in charge receives the banknote from the customer, sets the banknote in the setting unit 2 of the apparatus 1, and performs an operation of starting counting. Then, the screen control unit 68 switches the display mode to the first mode.
- the currency control information indicating the currency type set as the counting target and the count value of the banknote are combined in the first and second displays 81 and 82 by the control of the screen control unit 68. Displayed.
- the person in charge who operates apparatus 1 and the customer who uses apparatus 1 can recognize easily which kind of currency was counted with the counting result of a bill.
- the display mode of the currency identification information is appropriately set according to the operating state of the bill counting device 1. Can be selected.
- the screen control unit 68 has two types of display modes indicating both the currency identification information and the bill count value.
- the present invention is not limited to this. You may have more than one display mode. Alternatively, it may have only one type of fixed display mode.
- the currency identification information is not limited to the currency code, for example, an illustration representing the currency name and currency. Or images may be used.
- the device 1 has two screen display parts, the first and second displays 81 and 82, and displays both the currency identification information and the bill count value on each screen display part.
- the number of screen display units may be one, or three or more.
- both the currency identification information and the bill count value may be displayed only on some screen display units.
- the timing for switching the display mode is not limited to that described above.
- the timing at which the sensor detects that a bill has been placed on the set unit 2, the timing at which the first bill has passed through the identification unit 3, as the timing for switching from the second mode to the first mode for displaying currency identification information large You may use the timing etc. when the first banknote came out to the holding
- a mode for emphasizing and displaying the currency identification information may be used when the apparatus 1 authenticates the person in charge, for example, by reading an ID card, or when changing the setting.
- the display size of the currency identification information is changed between a plurality of display modes, but the method of changing the display mode of the currency identification information is not limited to this.
- the color or pattern attached to the currency identification information may be changed, or the brightness to be displayed may be changed.
- the currency identification information may be displayed blinking in the first mode and displayed without blinking in the second mode.
- FIG. 33A a currency image color, that is, a color (for example, red) representing a currency type is displayed as the currency identification information CI3.
- FIG. 33B the currency code and the image color are displayed together as the currency identification information CI4. That is, the screen control unit 68 displays the currency identification information and the count value of the banknote as a display mode (first mode) for displaying the currency type only in color as shown in FIG. 33A and a currency type as shown in FIG. 33B. May be displayed in characters and colors (second mode).
- the currency identification information CI4 is displayed more emphasized than in the first mode.
- the screen control part 68 uses a 1st mode (FIG. 33A) on the other hand so that it may become easy to see the count value of a banknote in the count state which the banknote counter 1 is performing count operation, for example.
- the second mode (FIG. 33B) may be used so that the currency type to be counted is more easily understood.
- 34A and 34B are other examples of display screens showing both currency identification information and banknote count values.
- a plurality of currency types (“HKD” Hong Kong dollars and “MOP” Macau Patacas in the figure) that are counted by the bill counting device 1 are displayed as the currency identification information CI5.
- a plurality of currency types that are candidates for counting are displayed as the currency identification information CI6, and the currency type set as the counting target (here, “HKD” Hong Kong dollar) is compared with other currency types. Is highlighted. In the example of FIG. 34B, “HKD” is highlighted, while the display brightness of “MOP” is lowered.
- the screen control unit 68 has a display mode for highlighting the currency type set as the counting target as compared with other currency types, as shown in FIG. 34B, as the display mode of the currency identification information and the bill count value. You may do it. For example, when the device 1 has a currency type recognition function, the screen control unit 68 emphasizes the currency type recognized by the device 1 as shown in FIG. 34B when counting the set banknotes. You may make it display.
- the bill count value data may be displayed on a monitor provided in the game hall.
- the device 1 is connected to an information system constructed in a game arcade by wire or wireless, and the count data counted by the device 1 can be transmitted to the information system.
- the transmitted count value is displayed on a monitor connected to the information system via a network.
- the customer of a game hall can see the count value of a banknote through the monitor of a game hall.
- the second display 82 that is a screen display unit for customers provided in the apparatus 1 may be omitted.
- the display of the currency identification information and the count value as described above may be applied to, for example, a coin counting device that counts coins. Or you may apply also to the apparatus which counts both a banknote and a coin. That is, the contents of the present disclosure can be applied to a money counting apparatus capable of counting money for a plurality of types of currencies.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- Inspection Of Paper Currency And Valuable Securities (AREA)
Abstract
A banknote-counting device (1) is provided with a setting unit (2) configured so that banknotes (B) are set, a holding unit (4), a conveying unit (5), and a discriminating unit (3). The setting unit (2) and the holding unit (4) are configured so that it is possible to see at least a portion of the banknotes (B) that are set and the banknotes (B) that are held. A conveying path (51, 52, 53) is configured so that it is always possible to see at least a portion of the banknotes while the banknotes are being conveyed along the conveying path.
Description
ここに開示する技術は、紙幣計数装置に関する。
The technology disclosed herein relates to a bill counting device.
特許文献1には、紙幣の識別及び計数を行う紙幣計数装置が記載されている。この装置は、卓上型である。この紙幣計数装置は、筐体の上部に設けられかつ、計数対象の紙幣が置かれる取込部と、筐体内に配設されかつ、紙幣の識別を行う識別部と、識別後の紙幣が集積される集積部と、を備えている。
Patent Document 1 describes a banknote counting device for identifying and counting banknotes. This device is a desktop type. This bill counting device is provided at the upper part of the housing and includes a take-in portion in which bills to be counted are placed, an identifying portion that is disposed in the housing and identifies bills, and bills after recognition are accumulated. And an accumulating unit.
ところで、前記特許文献1に記載されている紙幣計数装置では、取込部(紙幣をセットするセット部に相当)に置かれた紙幣は、一旦、筐体の内部に送り込まれ、その後に、筐体の外に開口する集積部(紙幣を保持する保持部に相当)に集積される。人は、取込部に置かれた紙幣を見ることができると共に、集積部に集積された紙幣も、見ることができる。ところが、取込部から集積部までの間は、人は、紙幣を見ることができない。
By the way, in the banknote counting device described in Patent Document 1, a banknote placed in a take-in unit (corresponding to a set unit for setting banknotes) is once sent into the housing, and thereafter, It is accumulated in a stacking part (corresponding to a holding part that holds bills) that opens to the outside of the body. A person can see the banknotes placed in the take-in section and can also see the banknotes accumulated in the stacking section. However, a person cannot see a banknote between the taking-in part and the stacking part.
こうした紙幣計数装置は、例えば遊技場等の施設において、遊技場の担当者が客から手渡された紙幣の識別及び計数を行う際に利用することがある。紙幣計数装置を利用することによって、紙幣の計数を正確に行うことが可能になる。しかしながら、計数の際に、紙幣計数装置の内部に紙幣が一旦取り込まれて見えなくなると、客から手渡されて取込部に置いた紙幣と、筐体の内部を通過して集積部に集積された紙幣とが同じであることを、客に対し示すことが難しくなる。その結果、計数結果の信頼性が損なわれる。
Such a bill counting device may be used when, for example, in a facility such as a game hall, a person in charge of the game hall performs identification and counting of a banknote handed over from a customer. By using the bill counting device, bills can be accurately counted. However, when the bill is once taken into the bill counting device and disappears during counting, the bill is handed over from the customer and placed in the take-up portion, and passes through the inside of the housing and is collected in the stacking portion. It is difficult to show the customer that the bill is the same. As a result, the reliability of the counting result is impaired.
ここに開示する技術はかかる点に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的とするところは、計数対象の紙幣を、計数動作中に常時、見ることができるようにすることにある。
The technology disclosed herein has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the technology is to make it possible to always view the bills to be counted during the counting operation.
ここに開示する技術は、紙幣の識別及び計数を行うように構成された紙幣計数装置に関する。この紙幣計数装置は、計数対象の前記紙幣がセットされるよう構成されたセット部と、前記セット部から繰り出された前記紙幣の識別及び計数を行うよう構成された識別部と、前記識別部が識別を行った後の前記紙幣を保持するよう構成された保持部と、前記セット部と前記保持部との間をつなぐ搬送路を有しかつ、前記セット部から繰り出された前記紙幣を一枚ずつ、前記識別部を通過させた後、前記保持部にまで搬送するよう構成された搬送部と、を備える。
The technology disclosed herein relates to a bill counting device configured to identify and count bills. The bill counting device includes a set unit configured to set the bills to be counted, an identifying unit configured to identify and count the bills fed out from the set unit, and the identifying unit. One piece of the banknote that has a holding part configured to hold the banknote after identification, and a conveyance path that connects between the set part and the holding part, and that is fed out from the set part And a conveyance unit configured to convey the identification unit to the holding unit after passing through the identification unit.
そして、前記セット部は、当該セット部にセットされた前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成され、前記保持部は、当該保持部に保持した前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成され、前記搬送部は、前記搬送路に沿って前記紙幣が搬送されている最中に、前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を、常時、見ることができるように構成されている。
And the said setting part is comprised so that at least one part of the said banknote set to the said setting part can be seen, and the said holding | maintenance part can see at least one part of the said banknote hold | maintained at the said holding part. The transport unit is configured so that at least a part of the banknote can be seen at all times while the banknote is being transported along the transport path.
この構成によると、紙幣は、セット部から搬送路に沿って搬送されて保持部に至る。紙幣がセット部から保持部に至るまでの間に、識別部は紙幣の識別及び計数を行う。
According to this configuration, the banknote is transported from the set unit along the transport path to the holding unit. The identification unit performs identification and counting of the banknotes until the banknotes reach the holding unit from the set unit.
セット部は、セットされた紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成されている。保持部も、保持している紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成されている。
The set unit is configured so that at least a part of the set banknote can be seen. The holding unit is also configured so that at least a part of the banknote held can be seen.
搬送部は、搬送中の紙幣の一部分を、常時、見ることができる構成されている。搬送中の紙幣も見ることができる。
The transport unit is configured to be able to always see a part of the bill being transported. You can also see the bills being transported.
従って、この紙幣計数装置は、紙幣がセット部から、識別部を経て、保持部に至るまでの間、常に、紙幣を見ることができるように構成されている。この紙幣計数装置は、人が紙幣を見ながら計数を行うため、計数結果の高い信頼性を確保することができる。
Therefore, this banknote counting apparatus is configured so that the banknote can always be seen from the set part to the holding part through the identification part. Since this banknote counting apparatus counts while a person looks at a banknote, it is possible to ensure high reliability of the counting result.
前記搬送路は、搬送される前記紙幣の表面及び裏面に相対するように配置されたガイドによって構成され、前記ガイド同士の間には、前記搬送路に沿って開口する開口部が設けられており、前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の一部分が前記開口部から外に飛び出した状態で、前記紙幣を前記搬送路に沿って搬送する、としてもよい。
The said conveyance path is comprised by the guide arrange | positioned so as to oppose the surface and the back surface of the said banknote conveyed, The opening part opened along the said conveyance path is provided between the said guides. The transport unit may transport the banknote along the transport path in a state where a part of the banknote protrudes from the opening.
こうすることで、搬送部は、ガイド同士の間に設けられた開口部から、紙幣の一部分が外に飛び出した状態で、紙幣を搬送路に沿って搬送するよう構成されている。人は、搬送中の紙幣を、常に見ることができる。
By carrying out like this, a conveyance part is comprised so that a banknote may be conveyed along a conveyance path in the state which a part of banknote protruded outside from the opening part provided between guides. A person can always see a banknote being conveyed.
前記識別部は、前記紙幣が進入する入口部と、前記紙幣が退出する出口部とを有するトンネル状に構成され、前記識別部は、前記紙幣が通過をするときに、前記紙幣の搬送方向先側の一部分が前記出口部から出た状態で、前記紙幣の搬送方向後側の一部分が前記入口部に入る前の状態になる形状である、としてもよい。
The said identification part is comprised by the tunnel shape which has the entrance part into which the said banknote approachs, and the exit part from which the said banknote retreats, The said identification part is a conveyance direction destination of the said banknote when the said banknote passes. It is good also as a shape which becomes a state before a part of the back side of the conveyance direction of the said banknote enters into the said entrance part in the state where the part of the side came out from the said exit part.
この構成によると、識別部は、入口部から進入した紙幣が、出口部から退出するトンネル状に構成されている。識別部はまた、紙幣の搬送方向先側の一部分が出口部から出た状態で、紙幣の搬送方向後側の一部分が入口部に入る前の状態になる形状である。従って、紙幣が識別部を通過するときにも、紙幣の全体が識別部の内部に入って外から見えなくなることが回避される。人は、紙幣がセット部から識別部を経て保持部に至るまでの間、常に、その紙幣を見ることができる。
According to this configuration, the identification unit is configured in a tunnel shape in which bills entering from the entrance part exit from the exit part. The identification part is also in a shape in which a part of the banknote in the conveyance direction is out from the outlet part and a part of the banknote in the conveyance direction rear side is in a state before entering the inlet part. Therefore, even when the bill passes through the recognition unit, it is avoided that the entire bill enters the recognition unit and is not visible from the outside. A person can always see the banknote from the set part to the holding part through the identification part.
前記セット部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣をセットするように構成され、前記搬送路の開口部は上向きに開口していて、前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の上部が前記開口部から外に飛び出すように、前記紙幣を立てた状態で、長手搬送するように構成され、前記保持部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣を保持するように構成されている、としてもよい。
The set part is open at least upward, and is configured to set the banknote in a state where the long edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the opening of the transport path opens upward. The conveying unit is configured to convey in the longitudinal direction in a state where the banknote is stood up so that an upper part of the banknote jumps out from the opening, and the holding unit is opened at least upward. It is good also as being comprised so that the said banknote may be hold | maintained in the state stood up with the longitudinal edge of the said banknote facing down.
セット部は上向きに開放されているため、セット部に立てた状態でセットされた紙幣は、装置の上方から見ることができる。保持部も上向きに開放されているため、保持部に立てた状態で保持された紙幣も、装置の上方から見ることができる。また、搬送路に沿って搬送されている紙幣も、上向きに開口する開口部から、外に飛び出すように立てた状態であるため、装置の上方から見ることができる。こうして、紙幣計数装置が紙幣の計数を行う際に、人は、常に、紙幣を、装置の上方から見ることができる。
Since the set unit is opened upward, banknotes set in a standing state on the set unit can be viewed from above the device. Since the holding portion is also opened upward, the banknote held in the state where it is raised on the holding portion can be seen from above the apparatus. Moreover, since the banknote currently conveyed along a conveyance path is the state stood up so that it might jump out from the opening part opened upwards, it can be seen from the upper direction of an apparatus. Thus, when the bill counting device counts bills, a person can always see the bill from above the device.
前記識別部は、前記紙幣の表面及び裏面の画像を取得する光学センサと、前記紙幣の厚みを検知する厚みセンサと、前記紙幣の磁気特性を検知する磁気センサと、を有し、前記光学センサは、立てた状態で長手搬送される前記紙幣の短手長さの全域に亘って延びて配設され、前記厚みセンサ及び前記磁気センサはそれぞれ、前記開口部よりも下側であって、前記紙幣において前記ガイドによって覆われる部分に対応する高さに配設されている、としてもよい。
The said identification part has an optical sensor which acquires the image of the surface of the said banknote, and a back surface, a thickness sensor which detects the thickness of the said banknote, and a magnetic sensor which detects the magnetic characteristic of the said banknote, The said optical sensor Is extended and arranged over the entire short length of the banknote transported longitudinally, and the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor are respectively below the opening and the banknote It is good also as arrange | positioning in the height corresponding to the part covered with the said guide.
こうすることで、光学センサは、紙幣の短手長さの全域に亘って延びて配設されるため、紙幣の表面全体の画像及び裏面全体の画像を取得することが可能になる。識別(例えば、真偽、正損、及び、金種の識別)に利用する情報を多くすることができ、識別の精度が向上する。また、識別を、多くの情報に基づいて速やかに行うことができ、識別に要する時間も短縮する。
By doing so, since the optical sensor is arranged extending over the entire short length of the banknote, it is possible to acquire an image of the entire front surface and an image of the entire back surface of the banknote. Information used for identification (for example, identification of true / false, harm, and denomination) can be increased, and the accuracy of identification is improved. In addition, identification can be performed quickly based on a large amount of information, and the time required for identification is shortened.
一方、厚みセンサ及び磁気センサは、搬送路の開口部よりも下側であって、立てた状態の紙幣において、ガイドによって覆われる部分に対応する高さに配設されている。このため、厚みセンサ及び磁気センサは、紙幣において開口部から飛び出した部分の情報は取得することができない。しかしながら、紙幣の厚みを検出することによって、紙幣が二枚以上重なっていないか否かを判定するだけであれば、紙幣の一部分において厚みを検出すれば、正確な判定を行うことが可能である。また、磁気センサについても取得することができる情報量は少なくなるものの、前述の通り、この紙幣計数装置は、計数対象の紙幣を人が見ながら、計数を行うことが可能である。磁気センサによって取得することができる情報量が少なくなったとしても、磁気センサの取得する情報と人が視認する情報とで紙幣が識別できるので、この紙幣計数装置は、識別の精度が低くならず、高い信頼性を確保することが可能である。
On the other hand, the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor are disposed below the opening of the transport path and at a height corresponding to a portion covered with the guide in the banknote in a standing state. For this reason, the thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor cannot acquire information on the portion of the banknote that protrudes from the opening. However, if it is only to determine whether or not two or more banknotes are overlapped by detecting the thickness of the banknotes, it is possible to make an accurate determination by detecting the thickness in a part of the banknotes. . In addition, although the amount of information that can be acquired for the magnetic sensor is also small, as described above, this bill counting device can count while a person is viewing the bill to be counted. Even if the amount of information that can be acquired by the magnetic sensor is reduced, the banknote can be identified by the information acquired by the magnetic sensor and the information that is visually recognized by the person. It is possible to ensure high reliability.
前記光学センサ、前記厚みセンサ及び前記磁気センサは、前記紙幣の搬送方向に順に並んでいる、としてもよい。
The optical sensor, the thickness sensor, and the magnetic sensor may be sequentially arranged in the banknote transport direction.
こうすることで、識別部を、立てた状態で通過する紙幣について、表面及び裏面の画像、厚みの情報、及び磁気特性を、光学センサ、厚みセンサ及び磁気センサによって、順に取得することが可能になる。
By doing so, it is possible to sequentially acquire the images of the front and back surfaces, the thickness information, and the magnetic characteristics of the banknote passing in the standing state by the optical sensor, the thickness sensor, and the magnetic sensor. Become.
前記セット部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣をセットするように構成され、前記搬送路の開口部は上向きに開口していて、前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の上部が前記開口部から外に飛び出すように、前記紙幣を立てた状態で、長手搬送するように構成され、前記保持部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣を保持するように構成され、前記識別部の前記入口部は、前記紙幣の搬送方向に対して上り勾配となるよう傾斜している、としてもよい。
The set part is open at least upward, and is configured to set the banknote in a state where the long edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the opening of the transport path opens upward. The conveying unit is configured to convey in the longitudinal direction in a state where the banknote is stood up so that an upper part of the banknote jumps out from the opening, and the holding unit is opened at least upward. And is configured to hold the banknote in a state where the longitudinal edge of the banknote is set up downward, and the inlet portion of the identification unit has an upward slope with respect to the conveyance direction of the banknote. It may be inclined.
こうすることで、紙幣の搬送方向先側の縁部が曲がっていたり、折れ気味であったりしたときでも、入口部が上り勾配となるように傾斜しているため、紙幣の搬送方向先側の縁部と、入口部とが徐々に交差しながら、紙幣が入口部に進入する。このことによって、紙幣の搬送方向先側の縁部の曲がりや折れを矯正することができる。識別部の入口部において、紙幣の詰まりが生じることが抑制される。
By doing so, even when the edge of the banknote in the conveyance direction is bent or bent, the entrance is inclined so as to have an upward slope. The bill enters the entrance portion while the edge portion and the entrance portion gradually intersect. This makes it possible to correct the bending and folding of the edge on the side of the banknote conveyance direction. The banknotes are prevented from being jammed at the entrance of the identification unit.
前記識別部内に前記紙幣を送り出すガイドローラーは、前記入口部の傾斜箇所に対応する搬送方向の位置に配設されている、としてもよい。
The guide roller for feeding the banknote into the identification unit may be disposed at a position in the transport direction corresponding to the inclined portion of the entrance unit.
紙幣を送り出すガイドローラーの配設箇所には力が加わる。ガイドローラーを、入口部の傾斜箇所に対応する搬送方向の位置に配設することによって、ガイドローラーの配設箇所の強度を確保することができる。
A force is applied to the location of the guide roller that feeds out banknotes. By arrange | positioning a guide roller in the position of the conveyance direction corresponding to the inclination location of an entrance part, the intensity | strength of the arrangement location of a guide roller is securable.
前記紙幣計数装置は、前記開口部から外に飛び出した前記紙幣を覆うように設けられかつ、光透過性の材料によって構成されたカバー部材をさらに備え、前記搬送路に沿って搬送されている前記紙幣の少なくとも一部は、前記カバー部材を通じて、常時、見ることができるように構成されている、としてもよい。
The banknote counting device is further provided with a cover member that is provided so as to cover the banknotes that have jumped out from the opening, and is transported along the transport path. At least a part of the banknote may be configured to be always visible through the cover member.
カバー部材によって、搬送中の紙幣を保護することが可能になる。紙幣の搬送をスムースに行うことが可能になる。
It is possible to protect bills being conveyed by the cover member. It becomes possible to carry out bills smoothly.
前記搬送路の少なくとも一部は、光透過性の材料によって構成されており、前記搬送路に沿って搬送されている前記紙幣の少なくとも一部は、前記搬送路において、前記光透過性の材料によって構成された部分を通じて、常時、見ることができるように構成されている、としてもよい。
At least a part of the transport path is made of a light transmissive material, and at least a part of the banknotes transported along the transport path is made of the light transmissive material in the transport path. It may be configured so that it can be always seen through the configured part.
この構成でも、搬送中の紙幣を、常時見ることができるようになる。つまり、紙幣の一部分が搬送路に設けた開口部から外に飛び出した状態で、紙幣を搬送する必要がない。これにより、搬送中の紙幣を保護するように搬送路を構成することが可能になり、紙幣の搬送をスムースに行うことが可能になる。尚、紙幣の一部分が搬送路に設けた開口部から外に飛び出すように搬送路を構成しつつも、その搬送路の一部を光透過性の材料によって構成してもよい。
Even with this configuration, it is possible to always see the bills being conveyed. That is, it is not necessary to convey a banknote in a state where a part of the banknote protrudes outside from an opening provided in the conveyance path. Thereby, it becomes possible to comprise a conveyance path so that the banknote currently conveyed may be protected, and it becomes possible to convey a banknote smoothly. In addition, you may comprise a part of the conveyance path with a light-transmitting material, comprising a conveyance path so that a part of banknote may jump out from the opening part provided in the conveyance path.
前記の紙幣計数装置によると、紙幣の計数を行う際に、紙幣を常に見ることができる。
According to the bill counting apparatus, bills can always be seen when counting bills.
以下、紙幣計数装置の実施形態を、図面を参照しながら説明する。尚、以下の説明は、紙幣計数装置の一例を示すものである。
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a bill counting device will be described with reference to the drawings. In addition, the following description shows an example of a banknote counting device.
(装置の全体構成)
図1及び図2は、紙幣計数装置1(以下、単に装置1とも呼ぶ)の外観を示している。装置1は、紙幣の識別と計数とを行う。装置1は、少なくとも紙幣の真偽及び金種を識別する。装置1は、複数の通貨の識別及び計数が可能である。計数対象の通貨は、予め設定される。計数対象の通貨は、変更が可能である。装置1は、例えば遊技場等の施設において、客から手渡された紙幣の識別及び計数を行うために用いられる。客は、例えば、紙幣を、遊技に使用するチップに両替する際に、遊技場の担当者に紙幣を手渡す。 (Overall configuration of the device)
1 and 2 show the appearance of a bill counting device 1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as device 1). Thedevice 1 performs bill identification and counting. The device 1 identifies at least the authenticity and denomination of the banknote. The device 1 can identify and count a plurality of currencies. The currency to be counted is set in advance. The currency to be counted can be changed. The apparatus 1 is used for identifying and counting bills handed over from customers in facilities such as a game hall, for example. For example, a customer hands a bill to a person in charge at a game hall when the bill is exchanged for a chip used for a game.
図1及び図2は、紙幣計数装置1(以下、単に装置1とも呼ぶ)の外観を示している。装置1は、紙幣の識別と計数とを行う。装置1は、少なくとも紙幣の真偽及び金種を識別する。装置1は、複数の通貨の識別及び計数が可能である。計数対象の通貨は、予め設定される。計数対象の通貨は、変更が可能である。装置1は、例えば遊技場等の施設において、客から手渡された紙幣の識別及び計数を行うために用いられる。客は、例えば、紙幣を、遊技に使用するチップに両替する際に、遊技場の担当者に紙幣を手渡す。 (Overall configuration of the device)
1 and 2 show the appearance of a bill counting device 1 (hereinafter also simply referred to as device 1). The
装置1は、テーブル、カウンター、机、及び、台等の上に置かれて使用される卓上型である。装置1は小型であり、テーブル等の上に置いても場所をとらない。尚、以下においては、説明の便宜上、図1における紙面右手前を装置1の前、紙面左奥を装置1の後ろ、紙面右奥を装置1の右、紙面左手前を装置1の左と呼ぶ。担当者は、通常は、装置1の前面を自分の方に向けて装置1を使用する。
The device 1 is a desktop type that is used by being placed on a table, counter, desk, table or the like. The device 1 is small and does not take up space when placed on a table or the like. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the right front side of FIG. 1 is referred to as the front of the apparatus 1, the left back side of the paper is referred to as the back of the apparatus 1, the right back side of the paper is referred to as the right of the apparatus 1, and the left front side of FIG. . The person in charge usually uses the apparatus 1 with the front side of the apparatus 1 facing toward him.
装置1は、上部11と下部12との、上下方向に重なる2つの部位から構成される。装置1の上部11と下部12とは、仕切板13によって隔てられる。
The apparatus 1 is composed of two parts, an upper part 11 and a lower part 12, overlapping in the vertical direction. The upper part 11 and the lower part 12 of the device 1 are separated by a partition plate 13.
装置1の上部11は、計数対象の紙幣を搬送しながら、識別と計数とを行うよう構成されている。装置1は、計数対象の紙幣がセットされるよう構成されたセット部2と、紙幣の識別及び計数を行うよう構成された識別部3と、識別を行った紙幣を保持するよう構成された保持部4と、セット部2から繰り出された紙幣を、一枚ずつ識別部3を通過させて保持部4にまで搬送するよう構成された搬送部5と、を備えている。
The upper part 11 of the apparatus 1 is configured to perform identification and counting while conveying bills to be counted. The apparatus 1 includes a set unit 2 configured to set bills to be counted, an identification unit 3 configured to identify and count banknotes, and a configuration configured to hold the identified banknotes. And a transport unit 5 configured to transport the banknotes fed from the set unit 2 one by one through the identification unit 3 to the holding unit 4.
装置1の下部は、装置1を動作させるために必要な各種の機器を収容するよう構成されている。具体的に、図1、2では図示を省略するが、装置1の下部は、各部2、3、4及び5の動作を制御する制御部6(図4参照)を収容する。装置1の下部はまた、各部2、3、4及び5において行う各種動作の駆動源であるモータや、駆動力を伝達する歯車等を収容する。さらに、装置1の下部には、コネクタ7(図4、図23参照)が設けられている。コネクタ7には、装置1に電力を供給する電源コードや、装置1を外部装置に対して接続する、又は、外部装置を装置1に接続するためのケーブルが接続される。
The lower part of the apparatus 1 is configured to accommodate various devices necessary for operating the apparatus 1. Specifically, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the lower part of the apparatus 1 accommodates a control unit 6 (see FIG. 4) that controls the operation of each unit 2, 3, 4, and 5. The lower part of the apparatus 1 also houses a motor that is a driving source for various operations performed in each of the units 2, 3, 4, and 5, a gear that transmits driving force, and the like. Further, a connector 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 23) is provided at the lower portion of the apparatus 1. The connector 7 is connected to a power cord for supplying power to the device 1 and a cable for connecting the device 1 to the external device or connecting the external device to the device 1.
装置1はまた、ここに開示する例では、第1ディスプレイ81と、第2ディスプレイ82との2つのディスプレイを備えている。第1ディスプレイ81は、主に担当者が見るためのディスプレイである。第2ディスプレイ82は、主に客が見るためのディスプレイである。第1ディスプレイ81及び第2ディスプレイ82の表示内容は、例えば遊技場等の施設の天井部等に取り付けた監視カメラからも確認することが可能である。
The apparatus 1 also includes two displays, a first display 81 and a second display 82, in the example disclosed herein. The first display 81 is a display mainly for the person in charge to see. The second display 82 is a display mainly for the customer to see. The display contents of the first display 81 and the second display 82 can be confirmed from a monitoring camera attached to a ceiling portion of a facility such as a game hall, for example.
セット部2は、図1及び図3に示すように、装置1の前部右側に配置される。仕切板13の上面は、セット部2において紙幣Bをセットするセット面として機能する。セット部2は、図1に2点鎖線で示すように、紙幣Bの長手の縁を下にして、仕切板13の上面に立てた状態に、紙幣Bをセットするように構成されている。セット部2は、装置1の上方及び前方に開放されている。セット部2に紙幣Bをセットしたときに、紙幣Bの上部及び搬送方向後部(後述するように、紙幣Bの搬送方向の進み側を紙幣Bの先、その逆側を紙幣Bの後としたときの後部)はそれぞれ、装置1の上方及び前方に飛び出す。担当者及び客は、セット部2にセットした紙幣Bの、少なくとも一部を見ることができる。
The set unit 2 is arranged on the right side of the front part of the apparatus 1 as shown in FIGS. The upper surface of the partition plate 13 functions as a set surface on which the bills B are set in the setting unit 2. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the setting unit 2 is configured to set the banknote B in a state where the long edge of the banknote B is down and standing on the upper surface of the partition plate 13. The set unit 2 is opened above and forward of the device 1. When the banknote B is set in the set unit 2, the upper part of the banknote B and the rear part in the transport direction (as will be described later, the leading side in the transport direction of the banknote B is the tip of the banknote B, and the opposite side is the back of the banknote B. The rear part of time) jumps up and forward of the device 1, respectively. The person in charge and the customer can see at least a part of the bill B set in the setting unit 2.
セット部2は、複数枚の紙幣Bを、水平方向に並べた状態で一度にセットすることが可能に構成されている。大きさの異なる紙幣Bが混ざり合っていてもよい。セット部2は、紙幣Bの繰り出し機構を有している。繰り出し機構は、セット部2にセットされた紙幣Bを一枚ずつ繰り出す。
The setting unit 2 is configured to be able to set a plurality of banknotes B at a time in a state where they are arranged in the horizontal direction. Banknotes B of different sizes may be mixed together. The set unit 2 has a bill B feeding mechanism. The feeding mechanism feeds the bills B set in the setting unit 2 one by one.
識別部3は、装置1の前後方向中央部の右側に配置される。識別部3とセット部2とは、装置1の前後方向に隣り合っている。識別部3は、紙幣Bが進入する入口部341及び紙幣Bが退出する出口部342を有している。セット部2から繰り出された紙幣は、識別部3を通過する。識別部3は、紙幣Bに関する情報を取得するセンサを有している。識別部3は、紙幣Bが通過をする際にセンサが取得した情報に基づいて、当該紙幣Bが受け入れ可能な正常紙幣であるか、受け入れ不可能なリジェクト紙幣であるかを判定する。識別部3はまた、正常紙幣の計数を行う。
The identification unit 3 is arranged on the right side of the central portion of the apparatus 1 in the front-rear direction. The identification unit 3 and the set unit 2 are adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction of the device 1. The identification unit 3 includes an entrance 341 through which the bill B enters and an exit 342 from which the bill B exits. The banknotes drawn out from the set unit 2 pass through the identification unit 3. The identification unit 3 has a sensor that acquires information about the banknote B. The identification unit 3 determines whether the banknote B is an acceptable normal banknote or an unacceptable reject banknote based on information acquired by the sensor when the banknote B passes. The identification unit 3 also counts normal banknotes.
保持部4は、装置1の前部左側に配置される。保持部4とセット部2とは、装置1の左右方向に隣り合っている。仕切板13の上面は、保持部4において紙幣Bを保持する保持面として機能する。保持部4は、紙幣Bの長手の縁を下にして、仕切板13の上面に立てた状態で紙幣Bを保持する。保持部4は、複数枚の紙幣Bを、水平方向に並べた状態で、一度に保持することができるよう構成されている。保持部4は、装置1の上方、前方及び左側方に開放されている。図1に2点鎖線で示すように、保持部4に保持されている紙幣Bの上部は、保持部4から上方に飛び出す。担当者及び客は、保持部4に保持されている紙幣Bを見ることができる。
The holding part 4 is arranged on the left side of the front part of the device 1. The holding unit 4 and the set unit 2 are adjacent to each other in the left-right direction of the device 1. The upper surface of the partition plate 13 functions as a holding surface that holds the banknote B in the holding unit 4. The holding unit 4 holds the bill B in a state where the bill B is erected on the upper surface of the partition plate 13 with the longitudinal edge of the bill B facing down. The holding | maintenance part 4 is comprised so that the several banknote B can be hold | maintained at once in the state arranged in the horizontal direction. The holding part 4 is opened upward, forward and leftward of the device 1. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the upper part of the bill B held by the holding unit 4 jumps upward from the holding unit 4. The person in charge and the customer can see the bill B held in the holding unit 4.
搬送部5は、セット部2から保持部4に至るように設けられる搬送路を有している。図3に示すように、搬送路は、第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52、及び第3搬送路53から構成されている。搬送路は全体として、平面視でU字状をなすように配設されている。
The conveyance unit 5 has a conveyance path provided from the setting unit 2 to the holding unit 4. As shown in FIG. 3, the conveyance path includes a first conveyance path 51, a second conveyance path 52, and a third conveyance path 53. The conveyance path as a whole is arranged so as to form a U shape in plan view.
搬送部5は、仕切板13の上面に紙幣Bを立てた状態で、一枚ずつ長手搬送する。各搬送路51、52、53は、水平方向に所定の間隔を空けて配設されるガイド55、56、57によって構成されている。ガイド55、56、57は、立てた状態で搬送される紙幣Bの表面及び裏面に相対する。ガイド55、56、57の高さは、紙幣Bの高さ(つまり、短手長さ)よりも低い。ガイドとガイドとの間には、上向きに開口する開口部50が設けられる。図1に2点鎖線で示すように、搬送中の紙幣Bの上部は、この開口部50から上方に飛び出す。担当者及び客は、搬送中の紙幣Bを見ることができる。
The conveyance unit 5 conveys the sheet B one by one in a state where banknotes B are erected on the upper surface of the partition plate 13. Each of the transport paths 51, 52, and 53 is configured by guides 55, 56, and 57 that are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. The guides 55, 56, and 57 are opposed to the front and back surfaces of the bill B that is conveyed in an upright state. The heights of the guides 55, 56, and 57 are lower than the height of the bill B (that is, the short length). An opening 50 that opens upward is provided between the guides. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 1, the upper part of the bill B being conveyed jumps upward from the opening 50. The person in charge and the customer can see the bill B being conveyed.
第1搬送路51と第2搬送路52との接続部分には、図2に示すように、分岐路58が接続されている。第2搬送路52の一部と分岐路58とでリジェクト部54を構成する。リジェクト部54は、識別部3によって、リジェクト紙幣と判定された紙幣Bを排出する部分である。リジェクト部54は、上方に開放していると共に、装置1の後部の右側面に開口し、リジェクト口54aを形成している。図2に2点鎖線で示すように、リジェクト部54に払い出されたリジェクト紙幣Bの一部は、リジェクト口54aから装置1の右側方に飛び出すと共に、リジェクト紙幣Bの上部は、リジェクト部54から上方に飛び出す。担当者及び客は、リジェクト紙幣Bを見ることができる。
As shown in FIG. 2, a branch path 58 is connected to a connection portion between the first transport path 51 and the second transport path 52. A reject portion 54 is configured by a part of the second conveyance path 52 and the branch path 58. The reject part 54 is a part that discharges the banknote B determined as a reject banknote by the identifying part 3. The reject part 54 opens upward and opens on the right side surface of the rear part of the apparatus 1 to form a reject port 54a. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 2, a part of the reject banknote B paid out to the reject unit 54 jumps out from the reject port 54 a to the right side of the apparatus 1, and an upper part of the reject banknote B is the reject unit 54. Jump upward from. The person in charge and the customer can see the reject banknote B.
図4は、装置1の動作に関係するブロック図を示している。セット部2、識別部3、保持部4及び搬送部5は、信号の送受が可能となるよう制御部6に電気的に接続されている。
FIG. 4 shows a block diagram related to the operation of the apparatus 1. The set unit 2, the identification unit 3, the holding unit 4, and the transport unit 5 are electrically connected to the control unit 6 so that signals can be transmitted and received.
また、第1ディスプレイ81及び第2ディスプレイ82も、制御部6に、電気的に接続されている。第1ディスプレイ81は、タッチパネル式のディスプレイによって構成されている。担当者は、第1ディスプレイ81において、各種の操作を行うことが可能である。第2ディスプレイ82は、タッチパネル式のディスプレイではなく、表示のみを行う。第1ディスプレイ81及び第2ディスプレイ82には、少なくとも計数結果が表示される。
The first display 81 and the second display 82 are also electrically connected to the control unit 6. The first display 81 is configured by a touch panel type display. The person in charge can perform various operations on the first display 81. The second display 82 is not a touch panel display, and only displays. The first display 81 and the second display 82 display at least the count result.
制御部6には、第1センサ61、第2センサ62、第3センサ63、第4センサ64及び第5センサ65が接続される。第1~第5センサ61~65はそれぞれ、紙幣Bを検知すると共に、検知信号を制御部6に出力する。図3に示すように、第1センサ61は、セット部2の近傍に配設されている。第1センサ61は、セット部2に紙幣Bがセットされたことを検知する。第2センサ62は、第2搬送路52に配設されている。第2センサ62が紙幣Bの通過を検知したときに、後述するように、正常紙幣とリジェクト紙幣との搬送の切り替えを行う。第3センサ63は第3搬送路53に配設されている。第3センサ63は、紙幣Bが保持部4に払い出されたことを検知する。第4センサ64は、リジェクト口54aの近傍に配設されている。第4センサ64は、リジェクト口54aに払い出された紙幣Bが、リジェクト口54aから抜き取られたことを検知する。第5センサ65は、保持部4に配設されている。第5センサ65は、保持部4に保持されていた紙幣Bが取り除かれたことを検知する。
The controller 6 is connected with a first sensor 61, a second sensor 62, a third sensor 63, a fourth sensor 64, and a fifth sensor 65. Each of the first to fifth sensors 61 to 65 detects the bill B and outputs a detection signal to the control unit 6. As shown in FIG. 3, the first sensor 61 is disposed in the vicinity of the set unit 2. The first sensor 61 detects that the bill B is set in the setting unit 2. The second sensor 62 is disposed in the second transport path 52. When the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the bill B, the conveyance between the normal bill and the reject bill is switched as will be described later. The third sensor 63 is disposed in the third conveyance path 53. The third sensor 63 detects that the banknote B has been paid out to the holding unit 4. The fourth sensor 64 is disposed in the vicinity of the reject port 54a. The fourth sensor 64 detects that the banknote B paid out to the reject port 54a has been extracted from the reject port 54a. The fifth sensor 65 is disposed in the holding unit 4. The fifth sensor 65 detects that the banknote B held by the holding unit 4 has been removed.
次に、装置1の計数動作について説明する。担当者が、客から手渡された紙幣Bをセット部2にセットすると、第1センサ61が紙幣Bを検知する。制御部6は、第1センサ61の検知結果を受けて、セット部2から紙幣Bを一枚ずつ繰り出す。
Next, the counting operation of the device 1 will be described. When the person in charge sets the banknote B handed over from the customer in the setting unit 2, the first sensor 61 detects the banknote B. The control unit 6 receives the detection result of the first sensor 61 and feeds the bills B from the set unit 2 one by one.
セット部2から繰り出された紙幣Bは識別部3を通過する。識別部3は、センサによって紙幣Bに関する情報を取得すると共に、その情報に基づいて、各紙幣が受け入れ可能な正常紙幣であるか、受け入れ不可能なリジェクト紙幣であるかを判定する。例えば、紙幣Bが計数対象の通貨以外の通貨であるときには、リジェクト紙幣であると判定される。また、2枚以上の紙幣が重なって搬送されているときにも、リジェクト紙幣であると判定される。さらに、真偽不確定の紙幣も、リジェクト紙幣であると判定される。識別部3はまた、正常紙幣については、その金種を識別する。識別部3は、正常紙幣の計数も行う。
The bill B fed out from the set unit 2 passes through the identification unit 3. The identification part 3 acquires the information regarding the banknote B with a sensor, and determines whether each banknote is an acceptable normal banknote or an unacceptable reject banknote based on the information. For example, when the bill B is a currency other than the currency to be counted, it is determined to be a reject bill. Moreover, when two or more banknotes are overlapped and conveyed, it is determined that the banknote is a reject banknote. Furthermore, it is determined that the bill with uncertain authenticity is also a reject bill. The identification unit 3 also identifies the denomination of normal banknotes. The identification unit 3 also counts normal banknotes.
識別部3を通過した紙幣Bは、搬送部5によって搬送されることで、第1搬送路51から第2搬送路52へと至る。第2センサ62が紙幣Bの通過を検知したときに、当該紙幣Bが正常紙幣であれば、その紙幣Bは、そのまま第3搬送路53に搬送される。
The banknote B that has passed through the identification unit 3 is transported by the transport unit 5 to reach the second transport path 52 from the first transport path 51. If the bill B is a normal bill when the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the bill B, the bill B is transported to the third transport path 53 as it is.
第3搬送路53に至った紙幣Bは、第3センサ63を通過し、その後、保持部4に払い出される。保持部4は、払い出された紙幣Bを順次保持する。紙幣Bは、水平方向に並んで保持される。第3センサ63の検知結果を受けて、制御部6は、セット部2から次の紙幣Bを繰り出す。制御部6は、計数動作の最中に、計数値をリアルタイムで、第1ディスプレイ81及び第2ディスプレイ82に表示させる。
The bill B that has reached the third transport path 53 passes through the third sensor 63 and is then paid out to the holding unit 4. The holding unit 4 sequentially holds the banknotes B that have been paid out. The bills B are held side by side in the horizontal direction. In response to the detection result of the third sensor 63, the control unit 6 feeds the next banknote B from the set unit 2. The control unit 6 displays the count value on the first display 81 and the second display 82 in real time during the counting operation.
第2センサ62が紙幣Bの通過を検知したときに、当該紙幣Bがリジェクト紙幣であれば、制御部6は、搬送部5を一時停止させる。その後、制御部6は、第2搬送路52に位置している紙幣Bが逆向きに搬送されるように、搬送部5を動作させる。紙幣Bは、第2搬送路52から分岐路58の方に搬送されて、リジェクト部54に払い出される。この状態で、装置1の動作は停止する。リジェクト部54に払い出されたリジェクト紙幣Bは、担当者が手で取り除く。第4センサ64が、リジェクト紙幣Bが取り除かれたことを検知すると、制御部6は、装置1の計数動作を再開する。
When the second sensor 62 detects the passage of the banknote B, if the banknote B is a reject banknote, the control unit 6 temporarily stops the transport unit 5. Then, the control part 6 operates the conveyance part 5 so that the banknote B located in the 2nd conveyance path 52 is conveyed in reverse direction. The bill B is transported from the second transport path 52 toward the branch path 58 and is paid out to the reject unit 54. In this state, the operation of the device 1 stops. The person in charge removes the reject banknote B paid out to the reject unit 54 by hand. When the fourth sensor 64 detects that the reject banknote B has been removed, the control unit 6 resumes the counting operation of the device 1.
セット部2にセットされた紙幣Bが全て繰り出されることによって、計数対象の紙幣Bの計数が全て終了すれば、制御部6は、計数結果、つまり、総額を第1ディスプレイ81及び第2ディスプレイ82に表示させる。こうして、装置1の計数動作が完了する。計数の完了後に、保持部4に保持されている紙幣Bは、担当者が手で取り除く。第5センサ65は、紙幣Bが取り除かれたことを検知する。
If all the counting of the bills B to be counted is completed by paying out all the bills B set in the setting unit 2, the control unit 6 displays the counting result, that is, the total amount, in the first display 81 and the second display 82. To display. Thus, the counting operation of the device 1 is completed. After the counting is completed, the person in charge removes the banknote B held by the holding unit 4 by hand. The fifth sensor 65 detects that the banknote B has been removed.
(搬送路の構成)
次に、搬送路の構成についてさらに詳細に説明をする。第1搬送路51は、第1ガイド55及び第2ガイド56によって構成される。第2搬送路52は、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57によって構成される。第3搬送路53は、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57によって構成される。尚、分岐路58は、第1ガイド55と第3ガイド57とによって構成される。 (Conveying path configuration)
Next, the configuration of the conveyance path will be described in more detail. Thefirst transport path 51 includes a first guide 55 and a second guide 56. The second transport path 52 includes a second guide 56 and a third guide 57. The third conveyance path 53 includes a second guide 56 and a third guide 57. The branch path 58 includes a first guide 55 and a third guide 57.
次に、搬送路の構成についてさらに詳細に説明をする。第1搬送路51は、第1ガイド55及び第2ガイド56によって構成される。第2搬送路52は、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57によって構成される。第3搬送路53は、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57によって構成される。尚、分岐路58は、第1ガイド55と第3ガイド57とによって構成される。 (Conveying path configuration)
Next, the configuration of the conveyance path will be described in more detail. The
第1ガイド55は、装置1の右側において、装置1の後部から前後方向の中央部にまで前後方向に延びている。第1ガイド55は、装置1の右側面の一部を構成する。第1ガイド55はまた、紙幣Bの搬送路を挟んだ片側において、識別部3の一部を構成する。
The first guide 55 extends in the front-rear direction on the right side of the apparatus 1 from the rear part of the apparatus 1 to the center part in the front-rear direction. The first guide 55 constitutes a part of the right side surface of the device 1. The first guide 55 also constitutes a part of the identification unit 3 on one side across the conveyance path of the bill B.
第2ガイド56は、装置1の左右方向の中央部に配置される。第2ガイド56は、装置1の後部から前端部にまで前後方向に延びている。第2ガイド56は、セット部2の一部を構成すると共に、保持部4の一部を構成する。第2ガイド56はまた、紙幣Bの搬送路を挟んだ片側において、識別部3の一部を構成する。
The second guide 56 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the device 1. The second guide 56 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear part to the front end part of the apparatus 1. The second guide 56 constitutes a part of the set part 2 and a part of the holding part 4. The second guide 56 also constitutes a part of the identification unit 3 on one side across the conveyance path of the bill B.
第3ガイド57は、装置1の後面の一部と左側面の一部とを構成する。第3ガイド57は、平面視で略L字状である。
The third guide 57 constitutes a part of the rear surface of the apparatus 1 and a part of the left side surface. The third guide 57 is substantially L-shaped in plan view.
図3に示すように、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57は、装置1の中央部に配置した第2ガイド56の周囲を囲むように配置されている。第1ガイド55、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57によって構成される第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53は、平面視でU字状をなしている。U字状の搬送路に沿って、上向きに開口する開口部50が設けられる。
As shown in FIG. 3, the first guide 55 and the third guide 57 are arranged so as to surround the second guide 56 arranged in the central portion of the apparatus 1. The first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 configured by the first guide 55, the second guide 56, and the third guide 57 are U-shaped in plan view. An opening 50 that opens upward is provided along the U-shaped conveyance path.
第1ガイド55、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57はそれぞれ、装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内、最もサイズが小さい紙幣Bの短手長さよりも、その高さが低い。図1に示すように、セット部2から保持部4までの間において、紙幣Bは、上向きに開口する開口部50から上方に飛び出す。このため、人は、搬送中の紙幣Bを、装置1の上方から見ることができる。また、この装置1は、セット部2が上方及び前方に開放されている。人は、セット部2にセットした紙幣Bを、装置1の上方から見ることができる。また、セット部2にセットされた複数枚の紙幣Bは、それぞれ立った状態で水平方向に並ぶ。セット部2にセットされた複数枚の紙幣Bの全てを、装置1の上方から見ることができる。保持部4も、上方、前方及び左側方に開放されている。人は、保持部4に保持している紙幣Bを、装置1の上方から見ることができる。また、保持部4に保持された複数枚の紙幣Bは、それぞれ立った状態で水平方向に並ぶ。保持部4に保持された複数枚の紙幣Bの全てを、装置1の上方から見ることができる。
The height of each of the first guide 55, the second guide 56, and the third guide 57 is lower than the short length of the smallest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1. As shown in FIG. 1, between the set part 2 and the holding | maintenance part 4, the banknote B jumps upwards from the opening part 50 opened upwards. For this reason, a person can see the bill B being conveyed from above the apparatus 1. Moreover, this apparatus 1 has the set part 2 opened upward and forward. A person can see the bill B set in the setting unit 2 from above the device 1. Moreover, the several banknote B set to the setting part 2 is located in the horizontal direction in the respectively standing state. All of the plurality of banknotes B set in the setting unit 2 can be viewed from above the apparatus 1. The holding part 4 is also opened upward, forward and leftward. A person can see the banknote B held in the holding unit 4 from above the device 1. Moreover, the several banknote B hold | maintained at the holding | maintenance part 4 is arranged in the horizontal direction in the respectively standing state. All of the plurality of banknotes B held by the holding unit 4 can be viewed from above the device 1.
担当者及び客は、装置1が計数を行っている間、常に、装置1の上方から紙幣Bを見ることができる。これにより、装置1は、計数結果の高い信頼性を確保することができる。
The person in charge and the customer can always see the bill B from above the device 1 while the device 1 is counting. Thereby, the apparatus 1 can ensure the high reliability of the counting result.
-搬送部に関する他の形態-
前記の構成では、紙幣Bを立てた状態で長手搬送するようにしている。これとは異なり、紙幣Bを横にした状態で長手搬送、又は、短手搬送するように、紙幣計数装置を構成してもよい。この構成では、例えば、搬送中の紙幣Bの一部分を、開口部から、紙幣計数装置の側方に飛び出させるようにしてもよい。 -Other forms related to the transport unit-
In the above-described configuration, the banknotes B are conveyed in the longitudinal direction in a standing state. Unlike this, you may comprise a banknote counter so that the banknote B may be conveyed longitudinally or short-sided. In this configuration, for example, a part of the bill B being conveyed may be caused to jump out of the opening to the side of the bill counting device.
前記の構成では、紙幣Bを立てた状態で長手搬送するようにしている。これとは異なり、紙幣Bを横にした状態で長手搬送、又は、短手搬送するように、紙幣計数装置を構成してもよい。この構成では、例えば、搬送中の紙幣Bの一部分を、開口部から、紙幣計数装置の側方に飛び出させるようにしてもよい。 -Other forms related to the transport unit-
In the above-described configuration, the banknotes B are conveyed in the longitudinal direction in a standing state. Unlike this, you may comprise a banknote counter so that the banknote B may be conveyed longitudinally or short-sided. In this configuration, for example, a part of the bill B being conveyed may be caused to jump out of the opening to the side of the bill counting device.
また、例えば図6に示すように、搬送部5において、光透過性の材料によって構成されたカバー部材510を取り付けるようにしてもよい。これにより、各搬送路51,52、53に沿って搬送されている紙幣Bを、カバー部材510を通じて、常時、見ることが可能になる。カバー部材510によって、搬送中の紙幣Bを保護することが可能になる。その結果、紙幣Bの搬送をスムースに行うことが可能になる。
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 6, a cover member 510 made of a light transmissive material may be attached in the transport unit 5. As a result, the bills B transported along the transport paths 51, 52, 53 can always be viewed through the cover member 510. The cover member 510 can protect the bill B being conveyed. As a result, the banknote B can be transported smoothly.
また、図示は省略するが、各搬送路を構成するガイドの一部を、光透過性の材料によって構成することにより、各搬送路に沿って搬送されている紙幣Bの一部分を、見ることができるように構成してもよい。この構成例において、ガイドは、前述したように、紙幣Bの高さよりも低くしなくてもよい。つまり、搬送中の紙幣Bの一部分が、ガイドとガイドとの間に設けられる開口部から飛び出さなくても、透明性材料によって構成されたガイドの部分を通じて、各搬送路に沿って搬送されている紙幣Bの、少なくとも一部分を、見ることができるようになる。
Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, by comprising a part of guide which comprises each conveyance path with a light-transmitting material, a part of banknote B currently conveyed along each conveyance path can be seen. You may comprise so that it can do. In this configuration example, the guide need not be lower than the height of the bill B as described above. That is, a part of the bill B being transported is transported along each transport path through the portion of the guide made of a transparent material without having to jump out from the opening provided between the guides. It becomes possible to see at least a part of the bill B.
(識別部の構成)
次に、識別部3の構成について詳細に説明する。図5は、識別部3のうち第2ガイド56に形成された部分を示している。図10は、識別部3のうち第1ガイド55に形成された部分を示している。識別部3は、紙幣Bの表面及び裏面の画像を取得する光学センサ31、紙幣Bの厚みを検知する厚みセンサ32、及び、紙幣Bの磁気特性を検知する磁気センサ33を有している。光学センサ31によって取得した紙幣Bの画像、及び、磁気センサ33が取得した紙幣Bの磁気特性に基づいて、紙幣Bが計数対象の通貨であるか否かの判定、真券であるか偽券であるかの判定、正券であるか損券であるかの判定、及び、紙幣Bの金種の判定を行う。また、厚みセンサ32が検知した紙幣Bの厚みの情報に基づいて、紙幣Bが一枚であるか、二枚以上重なって搬送されているかを判定する。 (Configuration of identification unit)
Next, the configuration of theidentification unit 3 will be described in detail. FIG. 5 shows a portion of the identification unit 3 formed on the second guide 56. FIG. 10 shows a portion of the identification unit 3 formed on the first guide 55. The identification unit 3 includes an optical sensor 31 that acquires images of the front and back surfaces of the bill B, a thickness sensor 32 that detects the thickness of the bill B, and a magnetic sensor 33 that detects the magnetic characteristics of the bill B. Based on the image of the bill B acquired by the optical sensor 31 and the magnetic properties of the bill B acquired by the magnetic sensor 33, it is determined whether the bill B is a currency to be counted, whether it is a genuine note or a fake note , Whether it is a genuine note or a non-defective note, and the denomination of the bill B are determined. Moreover, based on the information of the thickness of the banknote B detected by the thickness sensor 32, it is determined whether the banknote B is one sheet or two or more sheets are overlapped and conveyed.
次に、識別部3の構成について詳細に説明する。図5は、識別部3のうち第2ガイド56に形成された部分を示している。図10は、識別部3のうち第1ガイド55に形成された部分を示している。識別部3は、紙幣Bの表面及び裏面の画像を取得する光学センサ31、紙幣Bの厚みを検知する厚みセンサ32、及び、紙幣Bの磁気特性を検知する磁気センサ33を有している。光学センサ31によって取得した紙幣Bの画像、及び、磁気センサ33が取得した紙幣Bの磁気特性に基づいて、紙幣Bが計数対象の通貨であるか否かの判定、真券であるか偽券であるかの判定、正券であるか損券であるかの判定、及び、紙幣Bの金種の判定を行う。また、厚みセンサ32が検知した紙幣Bの厚みの情報に基づいて、紙幣Bが一枚であるか、二枚以上重なって搬送されているかを判定する。 (Configuration of identification unit)
Next, the configuration of the
光学センサ31は、図5,10に示すように、長手の縁を下にして立てた状態で、長手搬送される紙幣Bの表面側と裏面側とのそれぞれに配設されている。光学センサ31は、紙幣Bの短手長さの全域に亘って延びて配設されている。光学センサ31の上端は、図5に二点鎖線で示す、この装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内、最もサイズが大きい紙幣Bの上端よりも高い位置となる。
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 10, the optical sensor 31 is disposed on each of the front side and the back side of the banknote B that is transported in the longitudinal direction with the longitudinal edge thereof standing downward. The optical sensor 31 is disposed so as to extend over the entire short length of the bill B. The upper end of the optical sensor 31 is a position higher than the upper end of the largest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1 shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG.
厚みセンサ32は、光学センサ31に対し、搬送方向(つまり、図5に示す紙面左から右に向かう方向)の進み側に配置されている。厚みセンサ32は、立てた状態で長手搬送される紙幣Bの表面側と裏面側とに配設されかつ、紙幣Bを厚み方向に挟み込むローラーによって構成されている。厚みセンサ32と、光学センサ31とは、互いに動作に影響しない距離を保って配置されている。厚みセンサ32はまた、仕切板13から所定の高さ位置に配設されている。厚みセンサ32は、ガイド55によって覆われる紙幣Bの部分に対応する高さに配設されている。厚みセンサ32の高さは、この装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内で、最もサイズの大きい紙幣B(図5の二点鎖線参照)の、短手方向のほぼ中央に相当する。紙幣Bは、その長手の縁が、仕切板13の上面に当たった状態で搬送される。このため、前記の高さ位置に配置した厚みセンサ32は、識別部3を通過する紙幣Bを必ず挟むようになる。
The thickness sensor 32 is disposed on the advance side of the optical sensor 31 in the transport direction (that is, the direction from the left to the right in FIG. 5). The thickness sensor 32 is configured by a roller that is disposed on the front side and the back side of the banknote B that is conveyed longitudinally in an upright state, and that sandwiches the banknote B in the thickness direction. The thickness sensor 32 and the optical sensor 31 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation. The thickness sensor 32 is also disposed at a predetermined height position from the partition plate 13. The thickness sensor 32 is disposed at a height corresponding to the portion of the bill B covered by the guide 55. The height of the thickness sensor 32 corresponds to approximately the center in the short direction of the largest bill B (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5) among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1. The bill B is transported in a state where the long edge of the bill B hits the upper surface of the partition plate 13. For this reason, the thickness sensor 32 disposed at the height position always holds the bill B passing through the identification unit 3.
磁気センサ33は、厚みセンサ32に対して、搬送方向の進み側に配置されている。従って、光学センサ31、厚みセンサ32及び磁気センサ33は、装置1の前から後に向かって、この順番で配設されている。磁気センサ33と、厚みセンサ32とは、互いに動作に影響しない距離を保って配置されている。磁気センサ33はまた、仕切板13から所定の高さ位置に配設されている。磁気センサ33は、ガイド55によって覆われる紙幣Bの部分に対応する高さに配設されている。磁気センサ33の高さは、この装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内、最もサイズの小さい紙幣Bの短手方向のほぼ中央に相当する。磁気センサ33を、前記の高さ位置に配置することによって、識別部3を通過する紙幣Bの磁気特性を、必ず検知することができる。
The magnetic sensor 33 is disposed on the advance side in the transport direction with respect to the thickness sensor 32. Therefore, the optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are arranged in this order from the front to the rear of the apparatus 1. The magnetic sensor 33 and the thickness sensor 32 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation. The magnetic sensor 33 is also disposed at a predetermined height position from the partition plate 13. The magnetic sensor 33 is disposed at a height corresponding to the portion of the bill B covered by the guide 55. The height of the magnetic sensor 33 corresponds to approximately the center in the short direction of the smallest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1. By arranging the magnetic sensor 33 at the height position, the magnetic characteristics of the banknote B passing through the identification unit 3 can be detected without fail.
光学センサ31は、紙幣Bの短手長さの全域に亘って延びて配設されるため、紙幣Bの表面全体及び裏面全体の画像を取得することができる。識別に利用する情報量が多くなるため、識別の精度が向上する。また、多くの情報に基づいて速やかに識別を行うことができ、識別に要する時間も短縮する。
Since the optical sensor 31 is disposed so as to extend over the entire short length of the banknote B, it is possible to acquire images of the entire front surface and back surface of the banknote B. Since the amount of information used for identification increases, the accuracy of identification is improved. Moreover, identification can be performed quickly based on a large amount of information, and the time required for identification is shortened.
一方、厚みセンサ32及び磁気センサ33は、搬送路の開口部50よりも下側に配設されている。厚みセンサ32及び磁気センサ33は、紙幣Bにおいて、開口部50から飛び出した部分の情報を取得することができない。しかしながら、紙幣Bの厚みを検出することによって、紙幣Bが二枚以上重なっていないか否かを判定するだけであれば、紙幣Bの一部分において厚みを検出すれば、正確な判定を行うことが可能である。また、磁気センサ33によって取得することができる情報量は、比較的少ないが、この装置1は、前述の通り、計数対象の紙幣Bを人が見ながら、計数を行うことが可能である。磁気センサ33によって取得することができる情報量が少なくなったとしても、この装置1は、識別の精度及び信頼性が低下することはない。
On the other hand, the thickness sensor 32 and the magnetic sensor 33 are disposed below the opening 50 of the conveyance path. The thickness sensor 32 and the magnetic sensor 33 cannot acquire information on the portion of the banknote B that has popped out from the opening 50. However, if the thickness of the banknote B is detected to determine whether or not two or more banknotes B are overlapped, an accurate determination can be made if the thickness is detected in a part of the banknote B. Is possible. Further, although the amount of information that can be acquired by the magnetic sensor 33 is relatively small, as described above, the device 1 can perform counting while watching a bill B to be counted. Even if the amount of information that can be acquired by the magnetic sensor 33 decreases, the accuracy and reliability of the identification of the device 1 does not decrease.
光学センサ31の配設位置に、外からの光が入ると光学センサ31が取得する画像の精度が低下してしまう。また、光学センサ31は、前述したように、立てて搬送される紙幣Bの上端よりも高い位置まで延びている。そこで、識別部3は、光学センサ31を覆うカバー部34を有している。カバー部34は、第1ガイド55及び第2ガイド56よりも上方に突出している。カバー部34は、装置1の前後方向(図5における紙面左右方向)に広がっている。これにより、光学センサ31の配設箇所に光が入ることを防止している。
When the light from the outside enters the position where the optical sensor 31 is disposed, the accuracy of the image acquired by the optical sensor 31 is lowered. Moreover, the optical sensor 31 is extended to the position higher than the upper end of the banknote B conveyed by standing as mentioned above. Therefore, the identification unit 3 includes a cover unit 34 that covers the optical sensor 31. The cover part 34 protrudes above the first guide 55 and the second guide 56. The cover part 34 extends in the front-rear direction of the apparatus 1 (the left-right direction in FIG. 5). This prevents light from entering the location where the optical sensor 31 is disposed.
カバー部34の前側には、図1に示すように、紙幣Bが進入する入口部341が形成されている。また、図2に示すように、カバー部34の後側には、紙幣Bが退出する出口部342が形成されている。入口部341及び出口部342を有するカバー部34によって、識別部3はトンネル状となる。入口部341はセット部2に連続する。出口部342は搬送部5の開口部50に連続する。仕切板13の上面から入口部341及び出口部342の上端までの距離は、この装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内で、最もサイズの大きい紙幣Bの短手長さよりも長い。光学センサ31、厚みセンサ32及び磁気センサ33は全て、仕切板13の上面から入口部341及び出口部342の上端までの範囲内に位置している。光学センサ31、厚みセンサ32及び磁気センサ33は全て、立てた状態で搬送される紙幣Bの側方に位置する。
As shown in FIG. 1, an inlet portion 341 into which the bill B enters is formed on the front side of the cover portion 34. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 2, the exit part 342 from which the banknote B withdraws is formed in the rear side of the cover part 34. As shown in FIG. By the cover part 34 having the entrance part 341 and the exit part 342, the identification part 3 becomes a tunnel shape. The inlet portion 341 continues to the set portion 2. The outlet 342 is continuous with the opening 50 of the transport unit 5. The distance from the upper surface of the partition plate 13 to the upper ends of the inlet portion 341 and the outlet portion 342 is longer than the short length of the largest bill B among the bills B that can be counted in the apparatus 1. The optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are all located within the range from the upper surface of the partition plate 13 to the upper ends of the inlet portion 341 and the outlet portion 342. The optical sensor 31, the thickness sensor 32, and the magnetic sensor 33 are all located on the side of the bill B that is conveyed in an upright state.
入口部341は、図5に示すように、紙幣Bの搬送方向に対して上り勾配となるように傾斜している。入口部341の傾斜箇所の根元は、セット部2の上端部に位置する。入口部341の傾斜角度θは、図5に示す装置1では、45°以下である。入口部341を傾斜させることで、入口部341から進入する紙幣Bの搬送方向先側の縁部が曲がっていたり、折れ気味であったりしたときでも、紙幣Bの搬送方向先側の縁部と入口部341とが徐々に交差しながら、紙幣Bが入口部341に進入するようになる。このため、紙幣Bの曲がりや折れを矯正することができる。識別部3の入口部341において、紙幣の詰まりが生じることが抑制される。紙幣Bは、スムースに、入口部341に識別部3内に進入する。尚、出口部342は、紙幣Bの搬送方向に対してほとんど傾斜していない。
As shown in FIG. 5, the entrance portion 341 is inclined so as to have an upward gradient with respect to the conveyance direction of the bill B. The root of the inclined portion of the inlet portion 341 is located at the upper end portion of the set portion 2. The inclination angle θ of the inlet portion 341 is 45 ° or less in the apparatus 1 shown in FIG. By tilting the entrance 341, even when the edge of the banknote B entering from the entrance 341 is bent or folded, the edge of the banknote B in the transport direction The bill B enters the entrance 341 while gradually intersecting with the entrance 341. For this reason, the bending and folding of the bill B can be corrected. The banknotes are prevented from being jammed at the entrance 341 of the identification unit 3. The bill B smoothly enters the identification unit 3 at the entrance 341. In addition, the exit part 342 is hardly inclined with respect to the conveyance direction of the banknote B.
光学センサ31に対して、装置1の前側には、グリップローラー35が配設されている。グリップローラー35は、光学センサ31の動作に影響しない距離を保って配置されている。グリップローラー35に対して、装置1の前側には、ガイドローラー36が配設されている。ガイドローラー36は、入口部341の傾斜箇所に対応する搬送方向の位置に配設されている。ガイドローラー36は、識別部3内に紙幣Bを送り込むローラーである。ガイドローラー36の配設箇所には力が加わるが、ガイドローラー36を入口部341の傾斜箇所に対応する位置に配設することで、配設箇所の強度を確保することができる。
A grip roller 35 is disposed on the front side of the device 1 with respect to the optical sensor 31. The grip roller 35 is disposed at a distance that does not affect the operation of the optical sensor 31. A guide roller 36 is disposed on the front side of the apparatus 1 with respect to the grip roller 35. The guide roller 36 is disposed at a position in the transport direction corresponding to the inclined portion of the inlet portion 341. The guide roller 36 is a roller that feeds the banknote B into the identification unit 3. Although a force is applied to the location where the guide roller 36 is disposed, the strength of the location can be ensured by arranging the guide roller 36 at a position corresponding to the inclined location of the inlet portion 341.
ガイドローラー36とグリップローラー35とは、互いに動作に影響しない距離を保って配置されている。ガイドローラー36によって識別部3に送り込まれた紙幣Bは、グリップローラー35によって、確実に、識別部3を通過する。尚、グリップローラー35と、後述の分離ローラー37とによって、紙幣Bを、識別部3にスムースに送り込むことができるのであれば、ガイドローラー36は省略してもよい。
The guide roller 36 and the grip roller 35 are arranged at a distance that does not affect the operation. The bill B sent to the identification unit 3 by the guide roller 36 surely passes the identification unit 3 by the grip roller 35. Note that the guide roller 36 may be omitted as long as the bill B can be smoothly fed into the identification unit 3 by the grip roller 35 and the separation roller 37 described later.
図5における符号37は、セット部2に設けられた分離ローラーである。分離ローラー37は、セット部2から紙幣Bを一枚ずつ繰り出すために、紙幣Bの繰り出し方向とは逆方向に回転をする。分離ローラー37とガイドローラー36とは、互いに動作に影響しない距離を保って配置されている。
5 is a separation roller provided in the set unit 2. The separation roller 37 rotates in the direction opposite to the feeding direction of the bills B in order to feed the bills B one by one from the setting unit 2. The separation roller 37 and the guide roller 36 are disposed at a distance that does not affect the operation of each other.
識別部3は、入口部341と出口部342とを有しかつ、紙幣Bが通過をするトンネル状に構成されている。図5に示すように、紙幣Bが識別部3を通過するときに、紙幣Bの搬送方向先側の一部分が出口部342から出た状態で、紙幣Bの搬送方向後側の一部分が入口部341に入る前の状態となる(図5の網掛け部分を参照)。識別部3のカバー部34は、その前後方向の長さが長くなりすぎないように構成されている。入口部341の根元から出口部342の根元までの距離Lは、装置1において計数可能な紙幣Bの内、最もサイズが小さい紙幣Bの長手長さよりも短い。これにより、紙幣Bが識別部3を通過するときでも、紙幣Bの少なくとも一部分は見ることができる。つまり、紙幣Bの全体が識別部3の内部に入って外から見えなくなる状態になることが回避される。こうして、この装置1は、人が常に紙幣Bを見ながら、計数を行うことができる。この装置1は、計数結果の高い信頼性を確保することができる。
The identification unit 3 has an entrance 341 and an exit 342, and is configured in a tunnel shape through which the bill B passes. As shown in FIG. 5, when the bill B passes through the identification unit 3, a portion of the bill B in the transport direction ahead side exits from the outlet 342, and a portion of the bill B in the transport direction rear side is the entrance portion. This is the state before entering 341 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 5). The cover 34 of the identification unit 3 is configured so that the length in the front-rear direction does not become too long. The distance L from the root of the inlet 341 to the root of the outlet 342 is shorter than the longitudinal length of the banknote B having the smallest size among the banknotes B that can be counted in the apparatus 1. Thereby, even when the banknote B passes the identification part 3, at least one part of the banknote B can be seen. That is, it is avoided that the entire bill B enters the inside of the identification unit 3 and becomes invisible from the outside. Thus, the device 1 can perform counting while a person always looks at the banknote B. This device 1 can ensure high reliability of the counting result.
-識別部に関する他の形態-
尚、前記の構成では、識別部3の光学センサ31を、紙幣Bの短手長さよりも長くすると共に、識別部3をトンネル状にしている。しかしながら、光学センサ31の長さを、第1ガイド55及び第2ガイドの高さ以下となるまで短くしてもよい。この構成では、図7に示すように、識別部3のカバー部34を省略することが可能である。識別部3は、トンネル状でなくてもよい。この構成では、光学センサ31は、紙幣Bの一部分の画像を取得することになるが、その場合でも、紙幣Bの識別は可能である。 -Other forms of identification-
In the above configuration, theoptical sensor 31 of the identification unit 3 is made longer than the short length of the bill B, and the identification unit 3 is formed in a tunnel shape. However, the length of the optical sensor 31 may be shortened until it becomes equal to or less than the height of the first guide 55 and the second guide. In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 7, the cover part 34 of the identification part 3 can be omitted. The identification unit 3 does not have to be in a tunnel shape. In this configuration, the optical sensor 31 acquires an image of a part of the bill B. Even in this case, the bill B can be identified.
尚、前記の構成では、識別部3の光学センサ31を、紙幣Bの短手長さよりも長くすると共に、識別部3をトンネル状にしている。しかしながら、光学センサ31の長さを、第1ガイド55及び第2ガイドの高さ以下となるまで短くしてもよい。この構成では、図7に示すように、識別部3のカバー部34を省略することが可能である。識別部3は、トンネル状でなくてもよい。この構成では、光学センサ31は、紙幣Bの一部分の画像を取得することになるが、その場合でも、紙幣Bの識別は可能である。 -Other forms of identification-
In the above configuration, the
(ガイドの構成)
第1ガイド55は、前述したように、装置1の右側において、装置1の後部から前後方向の中央部にまで前後方向に延びている。第1ガイド55は、図3に示すように、平面視でI字状である。第1ガイド55は、図2及び図8の左図に示すように、装置1の右側面の一部を構成する。第1ガイド55は、装置1の上部11から下部12にまで広がっている。第1ガイド55の下端部は、図8及び図9に示す回転軸X1周りに回動可能となるように、装置1に取り付けられている。第1ガイド55は、図8の左図に示すように、装置1の右側部において起立した状態と、図8の右図に示すように、装置1の右側方に傾いた状態とに切り替わる。図9に示すように、第1ガイド55が回動する角度範囲θ1は、45°である。尚、第1ガイド55は、90°以下の角度範囲θ1で回動可能にしてもよい。 (Guide structure)
As described above, thefirst guide 55 extends in the front-rear direction from the rear portion of the device 1 to the center portion in the front-rear direction on the right side of the device 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the first guide 55 has an I shape in plan view. The first guide 55 constitutes a part of the right side surface of the device 1 as shown in the left views of FIGS. 2 and 8. The first guide 55 extends from the upper part 11 to the lower part 12 of the device 1. The lower end of the first guide 55, so as to be rotatable on the rotation shaft X 1 around 8 and 9, is attached to the device 1. As shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, the first guide 55 switches between a state where the first guide 55 stands on the right side of the device 1 and a state where the first guide 55 is inclined to the right side of the device 1 as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8. As shown in FIG. 9, the angle range theta 1 which the first guide 55 is rotated it is 45 °. The first guide 55 may be rotated by 90 ° or less angle range theta 1.
第1ガイド55は、前述したように、装置1の右側において、装置1の後部から前後方向の中央部にまで前後方向に延びている。第1ガイド55は、図3に示すように、平面視でI字状である。第1ガイド55は、図2及び図8の左図に示すように、装置1の右側面の一部を構成する。第1ガイド55は、装置1の上部11から下部12にまで広がっている。第1ガイド55の下端部は、図8及び図9に示す回転軸X1周りに回動可能となるように、装置1に取り付けられている。第1ガイド55は、図8の左図に示すように、装置1の右側部において起立した状態と、図8の右図に示すように、装置1の右側方に傾いた状態とに切り替わる。図9に示すように、第1ガイド55が回動する角度範囲θ1は、45°である。尚、第1ガイド55は、90°以下の角度範囲θ1で回動可能にしてもよい。 (Guide structure)
As described above, the
第3ガイド57は、図3に示すように、平面視で略L字状である。第3ガイド57は、図1及び図2に示すように、装置1の後面の一部と左側面の一部とを構成する。第3ガイド57は、仕切板13よりも上側に設けられる。第3ガイド57は、装置1の上部11にのみ設けられる。第3ガイド57は、第3搬送路53を構成する箇所の下端部が、図8及び図9に示す回転軸X2周りに回動可能となるように、装置1に取り付けられている。第3ガイド57は、図8の左図に示すように、仕切板13の上に置かれた状態と、図8の右図に示すように、仕切板13の上から離れて倒れた状態とに切り替わる。図9に示すように、第3ガイド57の回動する角度範囲θ2は、90°である。尚、第3ガイド57は、90°以上の角度範囲θ2で回動可能にしてもよい。
As shown in FIG. 3, the third guide 57 is substantially L-shaped in plan view. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the third guide 57 constitutes a part of the rear surface of the apparatus 1 and a part of the left side surface. The third guide 57 is provided above the partition plate 13. The third guide 57 is provided only in the upper part 11 of the device 1. Third guide 57 has a lower end portion of the portion constituting the third conveyance path 53, so as to be rotatable on the rotation shaft X 2 around 8 and 9, is attached to the device 1. The third guide 57 is placed on the partition plate 13 as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, and the state where the third guide 57 falls apart from above the partition plate 13 as shown in the right diagram of FIG. Switch to As shown in FIG. 9, the angular range θ 2 in which the third guide 57 rotates is 90 °. Note that the third guide 57 may be rotatable in an angle range θ 2 of 90 ° or more.
第2ガイド56は、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57に対し、装置1の内方に配置されている。第2ガイド56は、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57とは異なり、装置1に対して固定されている。
The second guide 56 is disposed inside the apparatus 1 with respect to the first guide 55 and the third guide 57. Unlike the first guide 55 and the third guide 57, the second guide 56 is fixed to the device 1.
第1搬送路51は、図8の左図に示すように、第1ガイド55と第2ガイド56との距離が近くなった使用状態と、図8の右図に示すように、第1ガイド55が装置1の右側方に向かって回動することによって、第1ガイド55が第2ガイド56から離れた開放状態とに切り替わる。第1搬送路51は、装置1の右側方に開放される。第1搬送路51が開放状態になったときには、識別部3もまた開放状態となる。
As shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, the first conveyance path 51 includes a use state where the distance between the first guide 55 and the second guide 56 is short, and a first guide as illustrated in the right diagram of FIG. 8. As the 55 rotates toward the right side of the apparatus 1, the first guide 55 is switched to an open state away from the second guide 56. The first transport path 51 is opened to the right side of the apparatus 1. When the 1st conveyance path 51 will be in an open state, the identification part 3 will also be in an open state.
第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53は、図8の左図に示すように、第3ガイド57と第2ガイド56との距離が近くなった使用状態と、図8の右図に示すように、第3ガイド57が装置1の左側方に向かって回動することによって、第3ガイド57が第2ガイド56から離れた開放状態とに切り替わる。第2搬送路52は、装置1の後方に開放される。第3搬送路53は、装置1の左側方に開放される。L字状の第3ガイド57を90°回動させることによって、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53の両方を、全て開放することができる。第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53は、互いに異なる方向に開放される。
The second conveyance path 52 and the third conveyance path 53 are shown in a use state in which the distance between the third guide 57 and the second guide 56 is short, as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 8, and in the right diagram of FIG. As described above, when the third guide 57 rotates toward the left side of the device 1, the third guide 57 is switched to an open state away from the second guide 56. The second transport path 52 is opened behind the device 1. The third conveyance path 53 is opened to the left side of the apparatus 1. By rotating the L-shaped third guide 57 by 90 °, both the second transport path 52 and the third transport path 53 can be opened. The first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are opened in different directions.
装置1が計数を行っている最中に、紙幣Bがいずれかの搬送路51、52、53において詰まったときには、装置1が停止する。紙幣Bが第1搬送路51において詰まったとき、担当者は、第1ガイド55を、装置1の右外方に回動させることにより、第1搬送路51を開放状態にする。第1搬送路51は、装置1の右側部において外方に開放される。担当者は、第1搬送路51に詰まっている紙幣Bを見ることができ、当該紙幣Bを容易に取り除くことができる。
When the bill 1 is jammed in any of the transport paths 51, 52, 53 while the device 1 is counting, the device 1 stops. When the banknote B is jammed in the first conveyance path 51, the person in charge turns the first conveyance path 51 to the open state by rotating the first guide 55 outwardly to the right of the apparatus 1. The first transport path 51 is opened outward at the right side portion of the apparatus 1. The person in charge can see the banknote B jammed in the 1st conveyance path 51, and can remove the said banknote B easily.
また、第2搬送路52又は第3搬送路53において紙幣Bが詰まったときには、担当者は、第3ガイド57を、装置1の左外方に回動させる。これにより、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53を開放状態にする。第2搬送路52は、装置1の後部において外方に開放される。第3搬送路53は、装置1の左側部において外方に開放される。担当者は、第2搬送路52又は第3搬送路53に詰まっている紙幣を見ることができ、当該紙幣Bを容易に取り除くことができる。
Further, when the bill B is jammed in the second transport path 52 or the third transport path 53, the person in charge rotates the third guide 57 to the left outward of the device 1. Thereby, the 2nd conveyance path 52 and the 3rd conveyance path 53 are made into an open state. The second transport path 52 is opened outward at the rear part of the apparatus 1. The third conveyance path 53 is opened outward at the left side of the apparatus 1. The person in charge can see the banknote jammed in the 2nd conveyance path 52 or the 3rd conveyance path 53, and can remove the said banknote B easily.
また、第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53はそれぞれ、上方にも開放される。これにより、例えば遊技場等の施設の天井部に取り付けた監視カメラからも、開放した第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53を撮影することが可能になる。搬送路に詰まった紙幣Bを取り除くときに、担当者が不正を行うことを防止する効果が期待できる。
Also, the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are each opened upward. Thereby, it is possible to photograph the opened first transport path 51, second transport path 52, and third transport path 53 from a monitoring camera attached to the ceiling of a facility such as a game hall, for example. When removing the banknote B jammed in the transport path, an effect of preventing the person in charge from performing fraud can be expected.
第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52及び第3搬送路53はそれぞれ、装置1の、互いに異なる三方向の外方に向かって大きく開放される。このため、搬送路内に溜まったゴミや塵などの清掃を容易に行うことができる。
The first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, and the third transport path 53 are each largely opened toward the outside of the device 1 in three different directions. For this reason, it is possible to easily clean dust and dirt collected in the transport path.
また、第1ガイド55を回動させて第1搬送路51を開放させると、識別部3を開放させることができる。識別部3には、図8の右図に示すように、光学センサ31、厚みセンサ32、及び磁気センサ33が配設されている。識別部3を開放したときに、これらのセンサ31、32、33が全て露出する。従って、これらのセンサ31、32、33のメンテナンスを行うことが可能になる。
Further, when the first guide 55 is rotated to open the first transport path 51, the identification unit 3 can be opened. As shown in the right view of FIG. 8, the identification unit 3 is provided with an optical sensor 31, a thickness sensor 32, and a magnetic sensor 33. When the identification unit 3 is opened, all of these sensors 31, 32, and 33 are exposed. Therefore, maintenance of these sensors 31, 32, and 33 can be performed.
第1ガイド55は、装置1の上部11から下部12にまで広がる。第1ガイド55は、上下方向に長い。第1ガイド55の回動角度θ1を、比較的小さくすることによって、図9に示すように、第1ガイド55を装置1の外方に回動させたときの装置1の占有スペースが、大きくなってしまうことを回避することができる。尚、ここでいう占有スペースは、装置1を、それが置かれている面に投影した投影面積である。
The first guide 55 extends from the upper part 11 to the lower part 12 of the device 1. The first guide 55 is long in the vertical direction. By making the rotation angle θ 1 of the first guide 55 relatively small, as shown in FIG. 9, the occupied space of the device 1 when the first guide 55 is rotated outward of the device 1 is It can avoid becoming large. The occupied space here is a projected area obtained by projecting the apparatus 1 onto the surface on which the apparatus 1 is placed.
第3ガイド57は、装置1の上部11にのみ設けられるため、その高さは比較的低い。そのため、第3ガイド57の回動角度θ2を大きくしても、図9に示すように、第3ガイド57を装置1の外方に回動させたときの装置1の占有スペースは、大きくならない。
Since the 3rd guide 57 is provided only in the upper part 11 of the apparatus 1, the height is comparatively low. Therefore, even if the rotation angle θ 2 of the third guide 57 is increased, the occupied space of the device 1 when the third guide 57 is rotated outward of the device 1 is large as shown in FIG. Don't be.
-ガイドに関する他の形態-
尚、前記の構成では、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57をそれぞれ、水平方向に延びる回転軸X1、X2周りに回動するよう、装置1に取り付けているが、第1ガイド55、及び/又は第3ガイド57を、例えば上下方向に延びる回転軸周りに回動するよう、装置1に取り付けてもよい。 -Other forms of guide-
In the above-described configuration, thefirst guide 55 and the third guide 57 are attached to the apparatus 1 so as to rotate about the rotation axes X 1 and X 2 extending in the horizontal direction. And / or the third guide 57 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to rotate around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, for example.
尚、前記の構成では、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57をそれぞれ、水平方向に延びる回転軸X1、X2周りに回動するよう、装置1に取り付けているが、第1ガイド55、及び/又は第3ガイド57を、例えば上下方向に延びる回転軸周りに回動するよう、装置1に取り付けてもよい。 -Other forms of guide-
In the above-described configuration, the
また、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57を回動させるよう取り付けるのではなく、第1ガイド55及び/又は第3ガイド57を、例えば前後方向、左右方向、又は、それ以外の任意の方向に水平移動するよう装置1に取り付けるようにしてもよい。また、第1ガイド55及び/又は第3ガイド57を、上下方向に移動するよう装置1に取り付けるようにしてもよい。
In addition, the first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 are not attached to rotate, but the first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 are, for example, the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or any other direction. You may make it attach to the apparatus 1 so that it may move horizontally. Further, the first guide 55 and / or the third guide 57 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the vertical direction.
平面視でL字状の第3ガイド57は、第2ガイド56と共に第2搬送路52を構成するガイドと、第2ガイド56と共に第3搬送路53を構成するガイドとに分けてもよい。
The L-shaped third guide 57 in plan view may be divided into a guide that configures the second transport path 52 together with the second guide 56 and a guide that configures the third transport path 53 together with the second guide 56.
また、第1ガイド55及び第3ガイド57を可動に取り付けるのではなく、第2ガイド56を、装置1に対し可動に取り付けることによって、第1~第3搬送路51、52、53を開放可能にしてもよい。第2ガイド56は、例えば前後方向に移動するように装置1に取り付けてもよい。また、第2ガイド56は、上下方向に移動するように装置1に取り付けてもよい。
In addition, the first to third transport paths 51, 52, 53 can be opened by movably attaching the second guide 56 to the apparatus 1 instead of movably attaching the first guide 55 and the third guide 57. It may be. For example, the second guide 56 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the front-rear direction. Further, the second guide 56 may be attached to the apparatus 1 so as to move in the vertical direction.
前記で示す搬送路のレイアウトは一例である。搬送路は、例えば直線状に配設してもよい。ガイドの形状は、搬送路のレイアウトに応じて適宜変更される。
The layout of the conveyance path shown above is an example. The conveyance path may be arranged in a straight line, for example. The shape of the guide is appropriately changed according to the layout of the conveyance path.
前記の構成では、搬送中の紙幣Bの一部分が、開口部から外に飛び出すようにしている。しかしながら、搬送中の紙幣Bが外に飛び出さないように、第1ガイド55、第2ガイド56及び第3ガイド57を構成してもよい。
In the above-described configuration, a part of the bill B being conveyed jumps out from the opening. However, you may comprise the 1st guide 55, the 2nd guide 56, and the 3rd guide 57 so that the banknote B in conveyance may not jump out.
前記の構成では、紙幣Bを立てた状態で長手搬送するようにしている。これとは異なり、紙幣Bを横にした状態で長手搬送、又は、短手搬送するように、紙幣計数装置を構成してもよい。
In the above-described configuration, the banknotes B are vertically conveyed while standing. Unlike this, you may comprise a banknote counter so that the banknote B may be conveyed longitudinally or short-sided.
(リジェクト部の構成)
前述のように、装置1には、排出されたリジェクト紙幣を保持しておくリジェクト部54が設けられている。リジェクト部54は、分岐路58と分岐路58に連通する搬送路の一部とで構成されている。リジェクト部54は、リジェクト紙幣の一部がリジェクト口54aから外にはみ出した状態でリジェクト紙幣を保持している。以下、リジェクト部54の構成について詳しく説明する。 (Configuration of reject part)
As described above, theapparatus 1 is provided with the reject unit 54 that holds the discharged reject banknote. The reject unit 54 includes a branch path 58 and a part of the conveyance path that communicates with the branch path 58. The reject unit 54 holds the reject banknote in a state in which a part of the reject banknote protrudes from the reject port 54a. Hereinafter, the configuration of the reject unit 54 will be described in detail.
前述のように、装置1には、排出されたリジェクト紙幣を保持しておくリジェクト部54が設けられている。リジェクト部54は、分岐路58と分岐路58に連通する搬送路の一部とで構成されている。リジェクト部54は、リジェクト紙幣の一部がリジェクト口54aから外にはみ出した状態でリジェクト紙幣を保持している。以下、リジェクト部54の構成について詳しく説明する。 (Configuration of reject part)
As described above, the
前述の如く、搬送路は、図3に示すように、平面視でU字状に形成されている。詳しくは、第2搬送路52は、第1屈曲部511において第1搬送路51から屈曲し、第3搬送路53は、第2屈曲部521において第2搬送路52から屈曲している。
As described above, the conveyance path is formed in a U shape in plan view as shown in FIG. Specifically, the second conveyance path 52 is bent from the first conveyance path 51 at the first bent portion 511, and the third conveyance path 53 is bent from the second conveyance path 52 at the second bent portion 521.
第1屈曲部511には、図11に示すように、第1搬送ローラー512が設けられている。紙幣は、第1搬送ローラー512によって、第1搬送路51から第2搬送路52へ屈曲するように搬送される。第1搬送ローラー512は、上下方向に配列された複数の駆動ローラー513と、駆動ローラー513と共に紙幣を挟み込む従動ローラー514とを有している。従動ローラー514は、全ての駆動ローラー513に設けられているわけではなく、一部の駆動ローラー513に設けられている。この一部の駆動ローラー513には、2つの従動ローラー514が設けられている。従動ローラー514は、紙幣を駆動ローラー513の外周に沿って略90度屈曲させるように、駆動ローラー513の回転中心回りに90度離れた位置に設けられている。図10には、搬送路における上流側の従動ローラー514を示している。
The first bent portion 511 is provided with a first conveying roller 512 as shown in FIG. The banknote is conveyed by the first conveyance roller 512 so as to be bent from the first conveyance path 51 to the second conveyance path 52. The first transport roller 512 has a plurality of drive rollers 513 arranged in the vertical direction, and a driven roller 514 that sandwiches the bill together with the drive rollers 513. The driven rollers 514 are not provided for all the drive rollers 513 but are provided for some of the drive rollers 513. This driven roller 513 is provided with two driven rollers 514. The driven roller 514 is provided at a position 90 degrees apart around the rotation center of the drive roller 513 so that the bill is bent approximately 90 degrees along the outer periphery of the drive roller 513. FIG. 10 shows the driven roller 514 on the upstream side in the conveyance path.
第2屈曲部521には、図11に示すように、第2搬送ローラー522が設けられている。紙幣は、第2搬送ローラー522によって、第2搬送路52から第3搬送路53へ屈曲するように搬送される。第2搬送ローラー522は、上下方向に配列された複数の駆動ローラー523と、駆動ローラー523と共に紙幣を挟み込む従動ローラー524とを有している。従動ローラー524は、全ての駆動ローラー523に設けられているわけではなく、一部の駆動ローラー523に設けられている。この一部の駆動ローラー523には、2つの従動ローラー524が設けられている。従動ローラー524は、紙幣を駆動ローラー523の外周に沿って略90度屈曲させるように、駆動ローラー523の回転中心回りに90度離れた位置に設けられている。
The second bent portion 521 is provided with a second transport roller 522 as shown in FIG. The bill is conveyed by the second conveyance roller 522 so as to be bent from the second conveyance path 52 to the third conveyance path 53. The second transport roller 522 has a plurality of driving rollers 523 arranged in the vertical direction, and a driven roller 524 that sandwiches the bill together with the driving rollers 523. The driven rollers 524 are not provided in all the drive rollers 523 but are provided in some of the drive rollers 523. This driven roller 523 is provided with two driven rollers 524. The driven roller 524 is provided at a position 90 degrees apart around the rotation center of the drive roller 523 so that the bill is bent approximately 90 degrees along the outer periphery of the drive roller 523.
これら第1搬送ローラー512及び第2搬送ローラー522は、回転方向を切替可能に構成されている。つまり、第1搬送ローラー512及び第2搬送ローラー522は、紙幣がセット部2から保持部4へ向かう順方向と、順方向とは逆向きの逆方向とで紙幣の搬送方向を切り替えることができる。
The first transport roller 512 and the second transport roller 522 are configured to be able to switch the rotation direction. That is, the 1st conveyance roller 512 and the 2nd conveyance roller 522 can switch the conveyance direction of a banknote by the forward direction which a banknote goes to the holding | maintenance part 4 from the setting part 2, and the reverse direction opposite to a forward direction. .
分岐路58は、図3,11に示すように、搬送路から分岐している。分岐路58は、第1屈曲部511に接続され、第2搬送路52の延長線上に、即ち、第2搬送路52と一直線状に延びている。分岐路58は、第1ガイド55の後端部と第3ガイド57とで形成されている。分岐路58のうち、搬送路からの分岐部と反対側の端部は、装置1の後部の右側面に開口し、リジェクト口54aを形成している。また、分岐路58は、第2搬送路52と同様に上方へ開口している。分岐路58は、搬送路の一部(詳しくは、第2搬送路52の一部)と共に、リジェクト部54を構成している。
As shown in FIGS. 3 and 11, the branch path 58 branches off from the conveyance path. The branch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511 and extends on an extension line of the second transport path 52, that is, in a straight line with the second transport path 52. The branch path 58 is formed by the rear end portion of the first guide 55 and the third guide 57. The end of the branch path 58 opposite to the branch section from the transport path opens to the right side surface of the rear portion of the apparatus 1 to form a reject port 54a. Further, the branch path 58 opens upward similarly to the second transport path 52. The branch path 58 constitutes a reject portion 54 together with a part of the transport path (specifically, a part of the second transport path 52).
また、第1屈曲部511には、図11に示すように、紙幣の進路を搬送路から分岐路58へ切り替える切替部59が設けられている。図12は、切替部59の平面図である。
Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the first bent portion 511 is provided with a switching portion 59 that switches the path of the banknote from the conveyance path to the branch path 58. FIG. 12 is a plan view of the switching unit 59.
切替部59は、上下方向に互いに間隔を空けて配列された複数(具体的には4つ)の爪591を有し、全体として櫛歯状に形成されている。爪591は、押圧部592と案内部593とを有し、楔形状をしている。押圧部592と案内部593とは、爪591の先端において連結されている。押圧部592は、凹状に湾曲した形状をしている。案内部593は、基端部593bに対して先端部593aが折れ曲がった形状をしている。切替部59は、第1ガイド55の後端部において、上下方向に延びる回転軸A回りに回転可能に支持されている。切替部59は、図11に示すように、爪591の先端部が搬送路上に位置するように、付勢バネ594により付勢されている。切替部59は、通常時はストッパ(図示省略)に当接することによって、爪591の先端部が搬送路上に位置する。この位置を第1位置と称する。付勢バネ594は、付勢部材の一例である。
The switching unit 59 has a plurality of (specifically, four) claws 591 arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is formed in a comb-like shape as a whole. The claw 591 has a pressing portion 592 and a guide portion 593 and has a wedge shape. The pressing portion 592 and the guide portion 593 are connected at the tip of the claw 591. The pressing portion 592 has a concave curved shape. The guide portion 593 has a shape in which the distal end portion 593a is bent with respect to the proximal end portion 593b. The switching unit 59 is supported at the rear end portion of the first guide 55 so as to be rotatable around the rotation axis A extending in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 11, the switching unit 59 is biased by a biasing spring 594 so that the tip of the claw 591 is positioned on the transport path. The switching unit 59 normally contacts a stopper (not shown), so that the tip of the claw 591 is positioned on the conveyance path. This position is referred to as a first position. The biasing spring 594 is an example of a biasing member.
より具体的には、爪591は、第1位置においては、搬送路のうち第1屈曲部511上に位置している。第1屈曲部511には、第1搬送ローラー512が設けられている。図10に示すように、上流側の従動ローラー514は、爪591の間に配置されている。下流側の従動ローラー514の上下方向位置も、図示は省略するが、爪591の上下方向位置とは異なっている。そのため、爪591が回転しても、従動ローラー514とは干渉しない。また、爪591の上下方向位置は、駆動ローラー513の上下方向位置とも異なっている。そのため、第1位置においては、爪591は、駆動ローラー513に干渉することなく、駆動ローラー513の間に入り込んでいる。これにより、平面視で、爪591は、駆動ローラー513の外周を横切っている。つまり、爪591は、搬送路を横切った状態となっている。
More specifically, the claw 591 is located on the first bent portion 511 in the conveyance path in the first position. The first bent portion 511 is provided with a first transport roller 512. As shown in FIG. 10, the upstream driven roller 514 is disposed between the claws 591. Although not shown, the downstream position of the driven roller 514 on the downstream side is also different from the vertical position of the claw 591. Therefore, even if the claw 591 rotates, it does not interfere with the driven roller 514. Further, the vertical position of the claw 591 is different from the vertical position of the drive roller 513. Therefore, in the first position, the claw 591 enters between the driving rollers 513 without interfering with the driving roller 513. Thereby, the nail | claw 591 crosses the outer periphery of the drive roller 513 by planar view. That is, the claw 591 is in a state of crossing the conveyance path.
このように構成された切替部59は、紙幣が順方向へ搬送される場合には、その紙幣を第1搬送路51から第1屈曲部511を介して第2搬送路52へ案内する一方、紙幣が逆方向へ搬送される場合には、その紙幣を第2搬送路52から分岐路58へ案内する。
When the banknote is transported in the forward direction, the switching unit 59 configured in this way guides the banknote from the first transport path 51 to the second transport path 52 via the first bending section 511, When the bill is transported in the reverse direction, the bill is guided from the second transport path 52 to the branch path 58.
詳しくは、通常、切替部59は、付勢バネ594の付勢力により第1位置に位置する。このとき、爪591の押圧部592は、第1搬送路51から第1屈曲部511へ搬送される紙幣が当接する位置に位置している。そのため、第1搬送路51から順方向に搬送されてきた紙幣は、押圧部592に当接し、切替部59を付勢バネ594の付勢力に抗して押圧する。紙幣に押圧された切替部59は、図13に示すように、搬送路から退避した第2位置(具体的には、平面視で爪591と駆動ローラー513とが重ならない位置)まで移動する。
Specifically, the switching unit 59 is normally located at the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 594. At this time, the pressing portion 592 of the claw 591 is located at a position where a bill conveyed from the first conveying path 51 to the first bent portion 511 contacts. Therefore, the banknote conveyed in the forward direction from the first conveyance path 51 abuts on the pressing portion 592 and presses the switching portion 59 against the urging force of the urging spring 594. As illustrated in FIG. 13, the switching unit 59 pressed by the bill moves to a second position retracted from the conveyance path (specifically, a position where the claw 591 and the driving roller 513 do not overlap in a plan view).
第2位置においては、爪591は、駆動ローラー513の間から抜け出ている。押圧部592は、凹状に湾曲した形状をしており、切替部59が第2位置に位置するときには、駆動ローラー513の外周と実質的に平行な状態となっている。この状態において、押圧部592は、紙幣を駆動ローラー513の外周に沿った方向に案内する。つまり、押圧部592は、紙幣を第1搬送路51から第2搬送路52の方へ屈曲するように案内する。このように、切替部59は、紙幣の順方向への通過を許容しつつ、紙幣を第2搬送路52へ案内する。
In the second position, the claw 591 has come out from between the driving rollers 513. The pressing portion 592 has a concave curved shape, and is substantially parallel to the outer periphery of the driving roller 513 when the switching portion 59 is located at the second position. In this state, the pressing unit 592 guides the banknote in the direction along the outer periphery of the driving roller 513. That is, the pressing unit 592 guides the bill so that it is bent from the first transport path 51 toward the second transport path 52. Thus, the switching unit 59 guides the banknote to the second transport path 52 while allowing the banknote to pass in the forward direction.
一方、装置1は、前述の如く、識別部3によりリジェクトすべきと判定された紙幣は、第2搬送路52の第2センサ62を順方向に通過した後に一旦停止され、逆方向に搬送される。紙幣が第2センサ62を通過したときには、紙幣は必ず切替部59を通過しているので、切替部59は、付勢バネ594の付勢力により第1位置へ戻っている。つまり、リジェクト紙幣が逆方向に搬送されるときには、切替部59は第1位置に位置している。このとき、爪591の案内部593は、逆方向へ搬送される紙幣を第2搬送路52から分岐路58へ案内する位置に位置している。詳しくは、爪591が第1位置に位置している状態において、先端部593aは、平面視で駆動ローラー513と重なり合った状態となっている一方、基端部593bは、第2搬送路52の延長線に沿って延びている。つまり、先端部593aは、搬送路を横切った状態となっている。この案内部593により、第2搬送路52から分岐路58に亘る一直線状の搬送路が形成される。そのため、第2搬送路52を逆方向に搬送され、駆動ローラー513と下流側の従動ローラー514とに挟み込まれた紙幣は、第1搬送路51の方へ屈曲することなく、案内部593に案内されて、分岐路58の方へ導かれる。仮に、紙幣が駆動ローラー513の外周に沿って進もうとしても、案内部593の先端部593aが駆動ローラー513の外周を横切る位置に位置しているので、紙幣は先端部593aに当接し、先端部593aに沿って基端部593bへ案内され、さらに基端部593bに案内されて分岐路58の方へ導かれる。その後、リジェクト紙幣の一部がリジェクト口54aから外にはみ出す状態となると、搬送が停止される。このとき、リジェクト紙幣の一部は、第2搬送路52に残留している。つまり、排出されたリジェクト紙幣は、分岐路58と第2搬送路52の一部によって保持されている。尚、担当者がリジェクト部54の紙幣を抜き取ると、セット部2に紙幣が残留している場合には、残留紙幣の計数を再開する。
On the other hand, as described above, the apparatus 1 is temporarily stopped after the banknote determined to be rejected by the identification unit 3 passes through the second sensor 62 of the second transport path 52 in the forward direction, and is transported in the reverse direction. The When the bill passes through the second sensor 62, the bill always passes through the switching unit 59, so that the switching unit 59 is returned to the first position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 594. That is, when the reject banknote is conveyed in the reverse direction, the switching unit 59 is located at the first position. At this time, the guide portion 593 of the claw 591 is located at a position for guiding the bills conveyed in the reverse direction from the second conveyance path 52 to the branch path 58. Specifically, in a state where the claw 591 is located at the first position, the distal end portion 593a overlaps the driving roller 513 in plan view, while the proximal end portion 593b is connected to the second conveyance path 52. It extends along the extension line. That is, the front end portion 593a is in a state of crossing the conveyance path. The guide portion 593 forms a straight conveyance path from the second conveyance path 52 to the branch path 58. Therefore, the banknotes conveyed in the second conveyance path 52 in the reverse direction and sandwiched between the driving roller 513 and the downstream driven roller 514 are guided to the guide unit 593 without being bent toward the first conveyance path 51. Then, it is guided toward the branch path 58. Even if the bill tries to advance along the outer periphery of the driving roller 513, the tip portion 593a of the guide portion 593 is located at a position crossing the outer periphery of the driving roller 513, so that the bill comes into contact with the tip portion 593a, Guided along the portion 593a to the base end portion 593b, and further guided to the base end portion 593b and guided toward the branch path 58. Thereafter, when a part of the reject banknote protrudes from the reject port 54a, the conveyance is stopped. At this time, a part of the reject banknote remains in the second transport path 52. That is, the discharged reject banknote is held by a part of the branch path 58 and the second transport path 52. In addition, when the person in charge extracts the banknote of the rejection part 54, when the banknote remains in the setting part 2, counting of a residual banknote will be restarted.
このような構成とすることによって、搬送路の一部を利用してリジェクト部54を構成することができ、リジェクト部54を搬送路とは完全に別に設ける必要がないので、装置1を小型に形成することができる。
By adopting such a configuration, the reject unit 54 can be configured by using a part of the transport path, and it is not necessary to provide the reject unit 54 separately from the transport path. Can be formed.
また、リジェクト部54は、リジェクト紙幣の一部がリジェクト口54aから外にはみ出した状態でリジェクト紙幣を保持し、リジェクト紙幣の全体を収容する必要がないので、リジェクト部を小型にすることができ、ひいては、装置1を小型に形成することができる。
Moreover, since the rejection part 54 hold | maintains a rejection banknote in the state where a part of rejection banknote protruded outside from the rejection port 54a, and does not need to accommodate the whole rejection banknote, it can make a rejection part small. As a result, the device 1 can be formed in a small size.
さらに、排出されたリジェクト紙幣の一部は搬送路に残留し且つ、搬送路は紙幣の一部を露出させる開口部50を有しているので、担当者及び客は、処理中及び処理後のリジェクト紙幣の一部を常に視認することができる。
Furthermore, a part of the rejected banknote remains in the transport path, and the transport path has an opening 50 that exposes a part of the banknote. A part of the rejected banknote can always be visually confirmed.
また、分岐路58は、搬送路の第1屈曲部511に接続されている。第1屈曲部511は、紙幣の進路が第1搬送路51から第2搬送路52の方へ変更される場所なので、この場所に分岐路58を接続することによって、紙幣の進路を本来の搬送路か分岐路58かに切り替えやすい。
Further, the branch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511 of the transport path. Since the first bent portion 511 is a place where the course of the banknote is changed from the first transport path 51 to the second transport path 52, the path of the banknote is originally transported by connecting the branch path 58 to this place. Easy to switch to road or branch road 58.
さらに、分岐路58は、第2搬送路52の延長線上に延びているので、紙幣を第2搬送路52から分岐路58へ進入させる場合には、紙幣を第2搬送路52における搬送方向のまま搬送すれば、紙幣は自然と分岐路58へ導かれる。つまり、紙幣を分岐路58へスムースに案内することができる。
Furthermore, since the branch path 58 extends on an extension line of the second transport path 52, when the banknote enters the branch path 58 from the second transport path 52, the banknote is moved in the transport direction in the second transport path 52. If the bill is conveyed as it is, the bill is naturally guided to the branch path 58. That is, the bill can be smoothly guided to the branch path 58.
また、紙幣が搬送路を順方向に搬送される場合には、第2位置へ退避して紙幣の搬送を許容し、紙幣が搬送路を逆方向に搬送される場合には、第1位置に位置して紙幣を分岐路58へ案内する切替部59を設けているので、リジェクト紙幣の搬送方向を順方向から逆方向に切り替えることによって、リジェクト紙幣の進路を搬送路から分岐路58へ切り替えることができる。この構成によれば、切替部59を駆動する駆動源を要しないので、装置1の構成を簡易にすることができると共に、消費電力を低減することができる。
In addition, when the bill is transported in the forward direction in the transport path, it is retracted to the second position to allow the transport of the bill, and when the bill is transported in the reverse direction in the transport path, the bill is transported to the first position. Since the switching part 59 which guides the banknote to the branch path 58 is provided, the course of the reject banknote is switched from the transport path to the branch path 58 by switching the transport direction of the reject banknote from the forward direction to the reverse direction. Can do. According to this configuration, since a drive source for driving the switching unit 59 is not required, the configuration of the device 1 can be simplified and power consumption can be reduced.
さらに、切替部59が第1位置に位置する状態においては、案内部593は、分岐路58に沿って延びている。このため、逆方向に搬送され案内部593に当接したリジェクト紙幣は、スムースに分岐路58へ案内される。
Furthermore, in a state where the switching unit 59 is located at the first position, the guide unit 593 extends along the branch path 58. For this reason, the reject banknote conveyed in the reverse direction and in contact with the guide portion 593 is smoothly guided to the branch path 58.
また、切替部59は、互いに離間して配列された複数の爪591を有し、櫛歯状に形成されているので、紙幣と切替部59との接触面積を低減することができ、ひいては、紙幣が搬送される際の抵抗を低減することができる。
Further, since the switching unit 59 has a plurality of claws 591 arranged apart from each other and is formed in a comb-teeth shape, the contact area between the bill and the switching unit 59 can be reduced. Resistance when a bill is conveyed can be reduced.
-リジェクト部に関する他の形態-
前記の構成では、分岐路58が第1屈曲部511に接続されているが、分岐路58が搬送路に接続される場所は、これに限られるものではない。例えば、分岐路58は、第2屈曲部521に接続されていてもよい。さらには、分岐路58は、第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52又は第3搬送路53のように直線状に延びる部分に接続されていてもよい。また、分岐路58は、第1搬送路51の延長線上に延びていてもよい。 -Other forms related to the reject part-
In the above configuration, thebranch path 58 is connected to the first bent portion 511, but the place where the branch path 58 is connected to the transport path is not limited thereto. For example, the branch path 58 may be connected to the second bent portion 521. Furthermore, the branch path 58 may be connected to a portion that extends linearly, such as the first transport path 51, the second transport path 52, or the third transport path 53. Further, the branch path 58 may extend on an extension line of the first transport path 51.
前記の構成では、分岐路58が第1屈曲部511に接続されているが、分岐路58が搬送路に接続される場所は、これに限られるものではない。例えば、分岐路58は、第2屈曲部521に接続されていてもよい。さらには、分岐路58は、第1搬送路51、第2搬送路52又は第3搬送路53のように直線状に延びる部分に接続されていてもよい。また、分岐路58は、第1搬送路51の延長線上に延びていてもよい。 -Other forms related to the reject part-
In the above configuration, the
さらに、装置1は、リジェクト紙幣の搬送方向を順方向から逆方向に切り替えることによって、リジェクト紙幣を分岐路58へ導くように構成されているが、これに限られるものではない。リジェクト紙幣を順方向に搬送しながら、リジェクト紙幣の進路を搬送路から分岐路58へ切り替えるような構成であってもよい。例えば、ソレノイドアクチュエータ等によって切替部59のような進路を切り替える部材を駆動することによって、リジェクト紙幣の進路を搬送路と分岐路58とで切り替えることができる。
Furthermore, the apparatus 1 is configured to guide the reject banknote to the branch path 58 by switching the transport direction of the reject banknote from the forward direction to the reverse direction, but is not limited thereto. The configuration may be such that the path of the reject banknote is switched from the transport path to the branch path 58 while the reject banknote is transported in the forward direction. For example, the path of the reject banknote can be switched between the transport path and the branch path 58 by driving a member that switches the path such as the switching unit 59 by a solenoid actuator or the like.
(セット部の構成)
以下に、セット部2の詳細な構成について、図14~17を参照しながら説明する。図14は、セット部2の内部構造の斜視図である。図15は、セット状態におけるセット部2の一部を上方から見た図である。図16は、セット状態におけるセット部2の一部を前方から見た図である。図17は、繰り出し状態におけるセット部2の一部を上方から見た図である。 (Configuration of set part)
Hereinafter, a detailed configuration of theset unit 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the internal structure of the set unit 2. FIG. 15 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the set state as viewed from above. FIG. 16 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the set state as viewed from the front. FIG. 17 is a view of a part of the set unit 2 in the extended state as viewed from above.
以下に、セット部2の詳細な構成について、図14~17を参照しながら説明する。図14は、セット部2の内部構造の斜視図である。図15は、セット状態におけるセット部2の一部を上方から見た図である。図16は、セット状態におけるセット部2の一部を前方から見た図である。図17は、繰り出し状態におけるセット部2の一部を上方から見た図である。 (Configuration of set part)
Hereinafter, a detailed configuration of the
セット部2は、紙幣が挿入される開口部21(図1~3参照)と、セットされた紙幣が載置される仕切板13と、セットされた紙幣を繰り出す繰り出しベルト22と、紙幣のセット時における紙幣と繰り出しベルト22との接触を防止するガード部23と、紙幣の繰り出し時に紙幣を繰り出しベルト22に押し付ける押え部24と、各種ローラーと、繰り出しベルト22を駆動するためのモータ26とを有している。セット部2は、セット部2に紙幣をセットする際にはセット状態となり、セットされた紙幣を繰り出すときには繰り出し状態となる。セット状態及び繰り出し状態については後述する。
The setting unit 2 includes an opening 21 into which banknotes are inserted (see FIGS. 1 to 3), a partition plate 13 on which the set banknotes are placed, a feeding belt 22 for feeding out the set banknotes, and a set of banknotes A guard part 23 for preventing contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22 at the time, a pressing part 24 for pressing the banknote against the feeding belt 22 when the banknote is fed, various rollers, and a motor 26 for driving the feeding belt 22 Have. The set unit 2 is in a set state when a bill is set in the set unit 2, and is in a payout state when the set bill is paid out. The set state and the extended state will be described later.
開口部21は、第1ガイド55と第2ガイド56とで形成され、装置1の前部右側に配置されている。ここで、開口部21は、第1ガイド55の縁部と第2ガイド56の縁部とで形成された部分であり、言い換えると、開口縁部である。開口部21は、前述の如く、装置1の上方及び前方に開口している。装置1の上方は、詳しくは後述する繰り出しベルト22の幅方向の一方側に相当する。つまり、開口部21は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向の一方側に開口している。また、装置1の前方は、繰り出しベルト22による紙幣の繰り出し方向のうち、紙幣が繰り出される向きとは反対側に相当する。つまり、開口部21は、繰り出しベルト22による紙幣の繰り出し方向のうち、紙幣が繰り出される向きとは反対側にも開口している。そのため、紙幣は、開口部21を介して、上方から下方へ又は前方から後方へ向かってセット部2に挿入される。仕切板13、繰り出しベルト22、ガード部23、押え部24、各種ローラー及びモータ26は、開口部21よりも内側に配置されている。
The opening 21 is formed by the first guide 55 and the second guide 56 and is disposed on the right side of the front portion of the apparatus 1. Here, the opening 21 is a portion formed by the edge of the first guide 55 and the edge of the second guide 56, in other words, the opening edge. As described above, the opening 21 opens upward and forward of the device 1. The upper part of the device 1 corresponds to one side in the width direction of the feeding belt 22 described later in detail. That is, the opening 21 opens on one side in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. Further, the front of the apparatus 1 corresponds to the side opposite to the direction in which bills are fed out of the bill feeding directions by the feeding belt 22. That is, the opening 21 is also open on the opposite side to the direction in which the banknote is fed out of the banknote feeding direction by the feeding belt 22. Therefore, the banknote is inserted into the set unit 2 from the top to the bottom or from the front to the back through the opening 21. The partition plate 13, the feeding belt 22, the guard portion 23, the pressing portion 24, various rollers, and the motor 26 are disposed on the inner side of the opening portion 21.
繰り出しベルト22は、環状の無端ベルトである。以下、説明の便宜上、繰り出しベルト22の外周面を「表面221」と称し、内周面を「裏面222」と称する。また、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向と長手方向(周方向)との両方に直交する方向を「幅方向」と称する。繰り出しベルト22の表面221と裏面222とには、幅方向に延びる複数の歯(図示省略)が、長手方向に等間隔で配列されている。表面の歯と裏面の歯とは、同じ形状をしており、且つ同じ位置に配置されている。つまり、繰り出しベルト22のうち表面221に歯が設けられた部分の裏面222には、表面221の歯と同一の歯が設けられている。繰り出しベルト22は、その幅方向と仕切板13の法線方向とが一致する状態で仕切板13上に配置されている。
The feeding belt 22 is an annular endless belt. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the outer peripheral surface of the feeding belt 22 is referred to as “front surface 221”, and the inner peripheral surface is referred to as “back surface 222”. Further, a direction orthogonal to both the thickness direction and the longitudinal direction (circumferential direction) of the feeding belt 22 is referred to as a “width direction”. A plurality of teeth (not shown) extending in the width direction are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction on the front surface 221 and the back surface 222 of the feeding belt 22. The front teeth and the back teeth have the same shape and are arranged at the same position. That is, the same tooth as the tooth on the front surface 221 is provided on the back surface 222 of the portion of the feeding belt 22 where the tooth is provided on the front surface 221. The feeding belt 22 is disposed on the partition plate 13 in a state where the width direction thereof matches the normal direction of the partition plate 13.
各種ローラーは、少なくとも駆動ローラー251と、従動ローラー252と、ゲートローラー253と、ガイドローラー36と、分離ローラー37とを含んでいる。これらのローラーは、仕切板13に対して、繰り出しベルト22と同じ側に配置されている。
The various rollers include at least a driving roller 251, a driven roller 252, a gate roller 253, a guide roller 36, and a separation roller 37. These rollers are arranged on the same side as the feeding belt 22 with respect to the partition plate 13.
駆動ローラー251は、モータ26によって回転駆動される。モータ26は、仕切板13を挟んで繰り出しベルト22と反対側に配置されている。駆動ローラー251及び従動ローラー252に、繰り出しベルト22が巻回されている。駆動ローラー251の外周面には、繰り出しベルト22の歯と噛合する複数の歯が設けられている。同様に、従動ローラー252の外周面にも、繰り出しベルト22の歯と噛合する複数の歯が設けられている。駆動ローラー251がモータ26に駆動されることによって、繰り出しベルト22を駆動される。駆動ローラー251は、図17において反時計回りに回転し、繰り出しベルト22も反時計回りに回転する。
The driving roller 251 is rotationally driven by the motor 26. The motor 26 is disposed on the side opposite to the feeding belt 22 with the partition plate 13 interposed therebetween. The feeding belt 22 is wound around the driving roller 251 and the driven roller 252. A plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the feeding belt 22 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the drive roller 251. Similarly, a plurality of teeth that mesh with the teeth of the feeding belt 22 are also provided on the outer peripheral surface of the driven roller 252. When the driving roller 251 is driven by the motor 26, the feeding belt 22 is driven. The driving roller 251 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 17, and the feeding belt 22 also rotates counterclockwise.
ガイドローラー36及び分離ローラー37は、繰り出しベルト22の外側に配置されている。一方、ゲートローラー253は、繰り出しベルト22の内側に配置されている。紙幣が存在しない状態においては、駆動ローラー251とガイドローラー36とで繰り出しベルト22を挟み込むと共に、ゲートローラー253と分離ローラー37とで繰り出しベルト22を挟み込んでいる。
The guide roller 36 and the separation roller 37 are disposed outside the feeding belt 22. On the other hand, the gate roller 253 is disposed inside the feeding belt 22. In a state where no bill is present, the feeding belt 22 is sandwiched between the driving roller 251 and the guide roller 36, and the feeding belt 22 is sandwiched between the gate roller 253 and the separation roller 37.
ガイドローラー36は、紙幣を繰り出す方向に回転駆動される。つまり、ガイドローラー36は、図17において時計回りに回転する。ガイドローラー36と繰り出しベルト22は、紙幣を挟み込んで繰り出す。
The guide roller 36 is driven to rotate in the direction of feeding out banknotes. That is, the guide roller 36 rotates clockwise in FIG. The guide roller 36 and the feeding belt 22 feed the banknotes between them.
分離ローラー37は、繰り出し方向においてガイドローラー36よりも上流側に位置する。分離ローラー37は、紙幣の繰り出し方向とは反対向きに回転駆動される。つまり、分離ローラー37は、図17において反時計回りに回転する。繰り出しベルト22によって複数枚の紙幣が繰り出されそうになっても、分離ローラー37の反対向きの回転によって、繰り出しベルト22と接触する紙幣以外の紙幣の繰り出しが阻止される。
The separation roller 37 is located upstream of the guide roller 36 in the feeding direction. The separation roller 37 is rotationally driven in a direction opposite to the bill feeding direction. That is, the separation roller 37 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. Even if a plurality of banknotes are about to be fed out by the feeding belt 22, the feeding of the banknotes other than the banknotes in contact with the feeding belt 22 is prevented by the rotation of the separation roller 37 in the opposite direction.
ガード部23は、第1ガード部231と、第2ガード部232と、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232が連結された駆動シャフト233とを有している。ガード部23は、紙幣と繰り出しベルト22との接触を防止するガード状態と、紙幣と繰り出しベルト22との接触を可能とする退避状態との間で切り替え可能に構成されている。セット部2がセット状態のときに、ガード部23はガード状態となる一方、セット部2が繰り出し状態のときに、ガード部23は退避状態となる。
The guard part 23 has a first guard part 231, a second guard part 232, and a drive shaft 233 to which the first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 are connected. The guard unit 23 is configured to be switchable between a guard state that prevents contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22 and a retracted state that enables contact between the banknote and the feeding belt 22. When the set unit 2 is in the set state, the guard unit 23 is in the guard state, while when the set unit 2 is in the extended state, the guard unit 23 is in the retracted state.
第1ガード部231は、ガード状態において、図16に示すように、繰り出しベルト22の側面のうち、開口部21に近い方(即ち、仕切板13から遠い方)の第1側面223と対向するように配置されている。第1ガード部231は、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において繰り出しベルト22の表面221よりも突出している。
As shown in FIG. 16, the first guard portion 231 faces the first side surface 223 closer to the opening 21 (that is, farther from the partition plate 13) among the side surfaces of the feeding belt 22 in the guard state. Are arranged as follows. The first guard portion 231 protrudes from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22.
第2ガード部232は、ガード状態において、図16に示すように、繰り出しベルト22の側面のうち、開口部21から遠い方(即ち、仕切板13に近い方)の第2側面224と対向するように配置されている。第2ガード部232は、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において繰り出しベルト22の表面221よりも突出している。
As shown in FIG. 16, the second guard portion 232 faces the second side surface 224 that is farther from the opening 21 (that is, closer to the partition plate 13) among the side surfaces of the feeding belt 22 in the guard state. Are arranged as follows. The second guard portion 232 protrudes from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22.
第1ガード部231は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向において第1側面223に近づくほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221から離れるように傾斜した第1傾斜面234を有している。同様に、第2ガード部232は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向において第2側面224から離れるほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221から離れるように傾斜した第2傾斜面235を有している。つまり、第1傾斜面234及び第2傾斜面235は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221から離れるように傾斜している。
The first guard portion 231 has a first inclined surface 234 that is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it approaches the first side surface 223 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. Similarly, the second guard portion 232 has a second inclined surface 235 that is inclined so as to be separated from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it is separated from the second side surface 224 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. . That is, the first inclined surface 234 and the second inclined surface 235 are inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as the depth of the setting portion 2 increases in the width direction of the feeding belt 22.
第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232は、駆動シャフト233に連結されている。駆動シャフト233は、仕切板13の法線方向に延び、仕切板13に回転自在に支持されている。駆動シャフト233は、仕切板13の裏面側に配置されたモータ(図示省略)により回転駆動される。
The first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 are connected to the drive shaft 233. The drive shaft 233 extends in the normal direction of the partition plate 13 and is rotatably supported by the partition plate 13. The drive shaft 233 is rotationally driven by a motor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the partition plate 13.
ガード部23は、駆動シャフト233が回転駆動されることによって、ガード状態と退避状態との間で状態が切り替わる。ガード状態においては、前述の如く、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232が、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において繰り出しベルト22の表面221よりも突出した状態となっている。一方、退避状態においては、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232が、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221よりも引っ込んだ位置に退避している。つまり、上下方向に見たときに、ガード状態においては、繰り出しベルト22の第1側面223が第1ガード部231によって隠れているのに対し、退避状態においては、繰り出しベルト22の第2側面224が露出する。
The guard unit 23 is switched between a guard state and a retracted state when the drive shaft 233 is rotationally driven. In the guard state, as described above, the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 protrude from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22. On the other hand, in the retracted state, the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 are retracted to a position retracted from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22. That is, when viewed in the vertical direction, the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22 is hidden by the first guard portion 231 in the guard state, whereas the second side surface 224 of the feeding belt 22 is in the retracted state. Is exposed.
押え部24は、本体部240と、第1当接部241と、第2当接部242と、駆動シャフト243とを有している。
The pressing portion 24 has a main body portion 240, a first contact portion 241, a second contact portion 242, and a drive shaft 243.
本体部240は、概ね板状の形状をしている。本体部240は、繰り出しベルト22と対向する位置に配置されている。
The main body 240 has a generally plate shape. The main body 240 is arranged at a position facing the feeding belt 22.
第1当接部241及び第2当接部242は、本体部240のうち、繰り出しベルト22と対向する面において、本体部240から突出するように設けられている。第1当接部241及び第2当接部242は、上下方向に配列されている。繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において、第1当接部241と第1ガード部231とが対向し、第2当接部242と第2ガード部232とが対向している。
The first contact part 241 and the second contact part 242 are provided so as to protrude from the main body part 240 on the surface of the main body part 240 that faces the feeding belt 22. The first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are arranged in the vertical direction. In the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22, the first contact portion 241 and the first guard portion 231 face each other, and the second contact portion 242 and the second guard portion 232 face each other.
第1当接部241は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において本体部240から離れるように傾斜した第3傾斜面244を有している。同様に、第2当接部242は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において本体部240から離れるように傾斜した第4傾斜面245を有している。
The first abutting portion 241 has a third inclined surface 244 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes to the back of the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. Similarly, the second contact portion 242 has a fourth inclined surface 245 that is inclined so as to be away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing.
本体部240は、駆動シャフト243に連結されている。駆動シャフト243は、仕切板13の法線方向に延び、仕切板13に回転自在に支持されている。駆動シャフト243は、仕切板13の裏面側に配置されたモータ(図示省略)により回転駆動される。押え部24は、駆動シャフト243が回転駆動されることによって、退避状態と押え状態との間で状態が切り替わる。押え部24は、ガード部23と連動しており、ガード部23がガード状態のときに、押え部24が退避状態となり、ガード部23が退避状態のときに、押え部24が押え状態となる。セット部2がセット状態のときに、押え部24は退避状態となる一方、セット部2が繰り出し状態のときに、押え部24は押え状態となる。
The main body 240 is connected to the drive shaft 243. The drive shaft 243 extends in the normal direction of the partition plate 13 and is rotatably supported by the partition plate 13. The drive shaft 243 is rotationally driven by a motor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the partition plate 13. The state of the presser 24 is switched between the retracted state and the presser state when the drive shaft 243 is rotationally driven. The presser part 24 is interlocked with the guard part 23. When the guard part 23 is in the guard state, the presser part 24 is in the retracted state, and when the guard part 23 is in the retracted state, the presser part 24 is in the presser state. . When the set unit 2 is in the set state, the presser unit 24 is in the retracted state, while when the set unit 2 is in the extended state, the presser unit 24 is in the presser state.
退避状態においては、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242が、繰り出しベルト22から十分に離れた位置に位置している。繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242と第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232との間には、十分な間隔が確保されている。一方、押え状態においては、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242が、紙幣に当接し、紙幣を繰り出しベルト22の表面221に押し付ける。前述の如く、押え部24が押え状態となるときには、それに連動してガード部23が退避状態となるので、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242は、ガード部23に干渉することなく、紙幣に当接することができる。
In the retracted state, the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are located at positions sufficiently away from the feeding belt 22. In the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22, a sufficient interval is secured between the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 and the first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232. On the other hand, in the presser state, the first abutting portion 241 and the second abutting portion 242 abut against the bill and press the bill against the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22. As described above, when the presser portion 24 is in the presser state, the guard portion 23 is retracted in conjunction with the presser portion 24, so that the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 interfere with the guard portion 23. Without touching the banknote.
続いて、セット部2の動作について説明する。セット部2がセット状態のときには、ガード部23はガード状態となり、押え部24は退避状態となっている。そのため、開口部21を介して上方からセット部2を見た場合に、繰り出しベルト22の第1側面223は、第1ガード部231で覆われて露出していない。そのため、紙幣を、開口部21を介して上方から、即ち、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向に挿入する場合であっても、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22の第1側面223に引っ掛かることなく、紙幣をセット部2にスムースに挿入することができる。
Subsequently, the operation of the setting unit 2 will be described. When the set unit 2 is in the set state, the guard unit 23 is in the guard state, and the presser unit 24 is in the retracted state. Therefore, when the set unit 2 is viewed from above through the opening 21, the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22 is covered with the first guard unit 231 and is not exposed. Therefore, even if it is a case where a banknote is inserted from the upper direction through the opening part 21, ie, the width direction of the feeding belt 22, a banknote is not caught on the 1st side 223 of the feeding belt 22, and a banknote is set. 2 can be inserted smoothly.
また、このとき、押え部24は、ガード部23との間に十分な間隔を有する位置に配置されている。そのため、紙幣をガード部23又は押え部24に接触させることなく、セット部2にスムースに挿入することができる。
Further, at this time, the presser portion 24 is disposed at a position having a sufficient interval between the presser portion 24 and the guard portion 23. Therefore, the banknote can be smoothly inserted into the set unit 2 without contacting the guard unit 23 or the presser unit 24.
仮に、紙幣が第1ガード部231に接触したとしても、第1ガード部231は、第1傾斜面234を有している。第1傾斜面234は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221から離れるように傾斜している。そのため、紙幣が第1ガード部231に接触しても、紙幣は、セット部2の奥に進むにつれて繰り出しベルト22の表面221から離れるように第1傾斜面234によって案内される。こうして、紙幣はセット部2の奥へスムースに案内される。
Even if the banknote comes into contact with the first guard part 231, the first guard part 231 has the first inclined surface 234. The first inclined surface 234 is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. Therefore, even if a banknote contacts the 1st guard part 231, a banknote is guided by the 1st inclined surface 234 so that it may leave | separate from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 as it advances to the back of the set part 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2.
さらに、繰り出しベルト22の第2側面224に対向する位置に第2ガード部232が設けられ、第2ガード部232は、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221よりも突出している。そのため、セット部2の奥の方でも、紙幣の繰り出しベルト22への接触が第2ガード部232によって防止される。
Further, a second guard portion 232 is provided at a position facing the second side surface 224 of the feeding belt 22, and the second guard portion 232 protrudes from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22. Therefore, the second guard portion 232 prevents the bill from contacting the payout belt 22 even at the back of the set portion 2.
また、第2ガード部232は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において表面221から離れるように傾斜した第2傾斜面235を有している。そのため、紙幣が第2ガード部232に接触しても、紙幣は、セット部2の奥に進むにつれて繰り出しベルト22の表面221から離れるように第2傾斜面235によって案内される。こうして、紙幣はセット部2の奥へスムースに案内される。
Further, the second guard portion 232 has a second inclined surface 235 that is inclined so as to move away from the surface 221 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper in the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. . Therefore, even if the banknote contacts the second guard part 232, the banknote is guided by the second inclined surface 235 so as to move away from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set part 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2.
さらに、紙幣が抑え部24に接触する場合もあり得る。特に、押え部24においては、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242が本体部240から突出しているので、紙幣が第1当接部241又は第2当接部242に接触する場合があり得る。しかし、第1当接部241は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において本体部240から離れるように傾斜した第3傾斜面244を有している。そのため、紙幣が第1当接部241に接触しても、紙幣は、セット部2の奥に進むにつれて本体部240から離れるように第3傾斜面244によって案内される。こうして、紙幣はセット部2の奥へスムースに案内される。また、第2当接部242は、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向においてセット部2の奥に行くほど、繰り出しベルト22の厚み方向において本体部240から離れるように傾斜した第4傾斜面245を有している。そのため、紙幣が第2当接部242に接触しても、紙幣は、セット部2の奥に進むにつれて本体部240から離れるように第4傾斜面245によって案内される。こうして、紙幣はセット部2の奥へスムースに案内される。
Furthermore, there is a possibility that the banknote contacts the holding part 24. In particular, in the presser part 24, since the first contact part 241 and the second contact part 242 protrude from the main body part 240, the bill comes into contact with the first contact part 241 or the second contact part 242. There can be. However, the first contact portion 241 has a third inclined surface 244 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing. For this reason, even if the bill comes into contact with the first contact portion 241, the bill is guided by the third inclined surface 244 so as to move away from the main body portion 240 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2. Further, the second contact portion 242 has a fourth inclined surface 245 that is inclined so as to move away from the main body portion 240 in the thickness direction of the feeding belt 22 as it goes to the back of the set portion 2 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22. ing. Therefore, even if a bill comes into contact with the second contact portion 242, the bill is guided by the fourth inclined surface 245 so as to move away from the main body portion 240 as it goes deeper into the set portion 2. In this way, the bill is smoothly guided to the back of the setting unit 2.
続いて、セット部2が繰り出し状態になると、ガード部23は退避状態となり、押え部24は押え状態となる。ガード部23が退避状態となることにより、繰り出しベルト22の表面221が紙幣と接触可能な状態となると共に、押え部24が押え状態となることにより、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22の表面221に押し付けられる。こうして、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22の表面221に接触することにより、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22により適切に繰り出されていく。
Subsequently, when the set unit 2 is in the extended state, the guard unit 23 is in the retracted state, and the presser unit 24 is in the presser state. When the guard portion 23 is in the retracted state, the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 can be brought into contact with the banknote, and the banknote is pressed against the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22 when the pressing portion 24 is in the pressing state. . In this way, the bills are appropriately fed out by the feeding belt 22 as the bills come into contact with the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22.
尚、繰り出しベルト22によって繰り出された紙幣は分離ローラー37を通過することによって、1枚の紙幣だけがガイドローラー36まで搬送され、ガイドローラー36によって識別部3の内部へ取り込まれていく。
Note that the bills fed out by the feeding belt 22 pass through the separation roller 37, so that only one bill is conveyed to the guide roller 36 and is taken into the identification unit 3 by the guide roller 36.
以上のように、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向の一方側に開口する開口部21を有するセット部2に紙幣を該幅方向から挿入する場合であっても、第1ガード部231を設けることによって、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22の側面に引っ掛かることを防止することができる。これにより、紙幣をセット部2へスムースに挿入することができる。
As described above, even when a bill is inserted from the width direction into the set portion 2 having the opening portion 21 opened on one side in the width direction of the feeding belt 22, by providing the first guard portion 231, It is possible to prevent the bill from being caught on the side surface of the feeding belt 22. Thereby, a banknote can be smoothly inserted into the set part 2.
それに加えて、第1ガード部231に第1傾斜面234を設けることによって、紙幣が第1ガード部231に接触したとしても、紙幣をセット部2の奥の方へスムースに案内することができる。
In addition, by providing the first inclined surface 234 on the first guard portion 231, the bill can be smoothly guided toward the back of the set portion 2 even if the bill contacts the first guard portion 231. .
また、第2ガード部232を設けることによって、セット部2の奥の方でも、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22に接触することを防止することができる。さらに、第2ガード部232に第2傾斜面235を設けることによって、紙幣が第2ガード部232に接触したとしても、紙幣をセット部2のさらに奥の方へスムースに案内することができる。
Also, by providing the second guard part 232, it is possible to prevent the bills from coming into contact with the feeding belt 22 even at the back of the set part 2. Furthermore, by providing the second inclined surface 235 on the second guard part 232, the banknote can be smoothly guided further toward the back of the set part 2 even if the banknote contacts the second guard part 232.
また、セット部2が繰り出し時に紙幣に当接する第1当接部241および第2当接部242を有する押え部24を備える構成であっても、第1当接部241に第3傾斜面244を設け、第2当接部242に第4傾斜面245を設けることによって、紙幣が第1当接部241又は第2当接部242に接触したとしても、紙幣をセット部2の奥の方へスムースに案内することができる。
Moreover, even if it is the structure provided with the press part 24 which has the 1st contact part 241 and the 2nd contact part 242, which contact | abuts a banknote when the setting part 2 pays out, the 3rd inclined surface 244 is provided in the 1st contact part 241. Even if the bill comes into contact with the first abutment portion 241 or the second abutment portion 242 by providing the fourth inclined surface 245 on the second abutment portion 242, the bill is moved toward the back of the set portion 2. He can guide you smoothly.
このように、装置1においては、紙幣をセット部2へ開口部21を介して繰り出しベルト22の幅方向に挿入する場合であっても、紙幣をスムースに挿入することができる。これにより、紙幣を繰り出し方向とは異なる方向からセット部2に挿入することができる。
Thus, in the apparatus 1, even when the banknote is inserted into the setting unit 2 through the opening 21 in the width direction of the feeding belt 22, the banknote can be smoothly inserted. Thereby, a banknote can be inserted in the set part 2 from the direction different from a pay-out direction.
尚、開口部21は、繰り出し方向において紙幣が繰り出される向きとは反対側(即ち、装置1の前方)にも開口しているので、紙幣を繰り出し方向からセット部2に挿入することもできる。この場合においても、ガード状態における第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232が繰り出しベルト22の表面221よりも突出した状態となっているので、紙幣を表面221に接触させることなく、セット部2に挿入することができる。
In addition, since the opening part 21 is opened also on the opposite side (namely, the front of the apparatus 1) with respect to the direction in which the banknote is fed out in the feeding direction, the banknote can be inserted into the set unit 2 from the feeding direction. Even in this case, the first guard part 231 and the second guard part 232 in the guard state are in a state of projecting from the surface 221 of the feeding belt 22, so that the set unit 2 does not come into contact with the surface 221. Can be inserted into.
-セット部に関する他の形態-
尚、セット部2は、ガード部23を有しているが、ガード部23を省略してもよい。また、ガード部23は、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232を有しているが、第1ガード部231又は第2ガード部232を省略してもよい。また、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232には、それぞれ第1傾斜面234及び第2傾斜面235が設けられているが、第1傾斜面234及び第2傾斜面235の少なくとも一方を省略してもよい。 -Other forms related to the set part-
In addition, although theset part 2 has the guard part 23, you may abbreviate | omit the guard part 23. FIG. Moreover, although the guard part 23 has the 1st guard part 231 and the 2nd guard part 232, you may abbreviate | omit the 1st guard part 231 or the 2nd guard part 232. The first guard portion 231 and the second guard portion 232 are provided with a first inclined surface 234 and a second inclined surface 235, respectively. At least one of the first inclined surface 234 and the second inclined surface 235 is provided. It may be omitted.
尚、セット部2は、ガード部23を有しているが、ガード部23を省略してもよい。また、ガード部23は、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232を有しているが、第1ガード部231又は第2ガード部232を省略してもよい。また、第1ガード部231及び第2ガード部232には、それぞれ第1傾斜面234及び第2傾斜面235が設けられているが、第1傾斜面234及び第2傾斜面235の少なくとも一方を省略してもよい。 -Other forms related to the set part-
In addition, although the
また、セット部2は、押え部24を有しているが、押え部24を省略してもよい。押え部24の第1当接部241及び第2当接部242を省略し、本体部240で紙幣を繰り出しベルト22に押し付けるようにしてもよい。また、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242の何れか一方を省略してもよい。さらに、第1当接部241及び第2当接部242には、それぞれ第3傾斜面244及び第4傾斜面245が設けられているが、第3傾斜面244及び第4傾斜面245の少なくとも一方を省略してもよい。
Moreover, although the set part 2 has the presser part 24, the presser part 24 may be omitted. The first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 of the presser portion 24 may be omitted, and the bill may be pressed against the feeding belt 22 by the main body portion 240. Further, any one of the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 may be omitted. Further, the first contact portion 241 and the second contact portion 242 are provided with a third inclined surface 244 and a fourth inclined surface 245, respectively. At least the third inclined surface 244 and the fourth inclined surface 245 are provided. One may be omitted.
また、前記の構成では、開口部21は、上方及び前方に開口しているが、上方だけに開口する構成であってもよい。その場合、開口部21は、挿入される紙幣よりも大きく形成される。
In the above configuration, the opening 21 opens upward and forward, but may be configured to open only upward. In that case, the opening 21 is formed larger than the inserted bill.
ガード状態と退避状態とに切り替わるガード部23に代えて、駆動ローラー251と従動ローラー252との間に巻き掛けられた繰り出しベルト22を、待機状態と動作状態とに切り替わるように構成してもよい。図18及び図19は、繰り出しベルト22が、待機状態と動作状態とに切り替わるよう構成されたセット部2を示している。この構成では、駆動ローラー251、従動ローラー252及びゲートローラー253がそれぞれ、フレーム27に対して取り付けられている。従動ローラー252及びゲートローラー253は、フレーム27に対して、回転可能に支持されている。駆動ローラー251は、図19に示すように、モータ26の出力軸261に固定されている。モータ26が作動すると、出力軸261を介して駆動ローラー251が、図18における反時計回り方向に回転する。これに伴い、フレーム27に支持された繰り出しベルト22も、反時計回り方向に回転する。
Instead of the guard portion 23 that switches between the guard state and the retracted state, the feeding belt 22 that is wound between the driving roller 251 and the driven roller 252 may be switched between the standby state and the operating state. . 18 and 19 show the setting unit 2 in which the feeding belt 22 is configured to switch between a standby state and an operating state. In this configuration, the driving roller 251, the driven roller 252, and the gate roller 253 are each attached to the frame 27. The driven roller 252 and the gate roller 253 are rotatably supported with respect to the frame 27. The drive roller 251 is fixed to the output shaft 261 of the motor 26 as shown in FIG. When the motor 26 operates, the drive roller 251 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 18 via the output shaft 261. Along with this, the feeding belt 22 supported by the frame 27 also rotates counterclockwise.
出力軸261には、この出力軸261と一体となって回転する歯車262が取り付けられている。出力軸261と歯車262との間には、詳細な図示は省略するが、トルクリミッタが介設している。トルクリミッタは、出力軸261と歯車262との間のトルクの伝達が、所定の最大トルク以下となるように制限する。
A gear 262 that rotates integrally with the output shaft 261 is attached to the output shaft 261. Although a detailed illustration is omitted, a torque limiter is interposed between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262. The torque limiter limits the torque transmission between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined maximum torque.
フレーム27は、出力軸261を中心として回動するように支持されている。フレーム27の下部には係合部271が固定されている。係合部271は、歯車262と噛み合う。係合部271は、歯車262に平行でかつ、この歯車262に噛み合うような歯車の一部分(つまり、扇型に切り出された歯車)によって構成されている。出力軸261の回転と共に歯車262が回転したときに、係合部271がそのトルクをフレーム27に伝達することにより、フレーム27は、出力軸261を中心として回動するようになる。
The frame 27 is supported so as to rotate around the output shaft 261. An engaging portion 271 is fixed to the lower portion of the frame 27. The engaging portion 271 meshes with the gear 262. The engaging portion 271 is configured by a part of the gear (that is, a gear cut out in a fan shape) that is parallel to the gear 262 and meshes with the gear 262. When the gear 262 rotates with the rotation of the output shaft 261, the engaging portion 271 transmits the torque to the frame 27, so that the frame 27 rotates about the output shaft 261.
図18に破線で示すように、フレーム27は、セット部2がセット状態にあるときには、図示を省略する付勢部材(例えばばね)によって、出力軸261を中心として時計回りに方向に付勢をされている。このときにフレーム27に支持されている繰り出しベルト22は、セット部2を上方から見たときに、開口部21の縁よりも装置1の左側に位置している。繰り出しベルト22は待機状態となる。紙幣を、開口部21を介して上方から、即ち、繰り出しベルト22の幅方向に挿入する場合であっても、紙幣が繰り出しベルト22の第1側面223に引っ掛かることなく、紙幣をセット部2にスムースに挿入することができる。
As shown by a broken line in FIG. 18, when the set portion 2 is in the set state, the frame 27 is urged clockwise around the output shaft 261 by an urging member (for example, a spring) (not shown). Has been. At this time, the feeding belt 22 supported by the frame 27 is located on the left side of the device 1 with respect to the edge of the opening 21 when the set unit 2 is viewed from above. The feeding belt 22 is in a standby state. Even when the banknote is inserted from above through the opening 21, that is, in the width direction of the feeding belt 22, the banknote is not caught on the first side surface 223 of the feeding belt 22, and the banknote is inserted into the setting section 2. Can be inserted smoothly.
紙幣Bがセット部2にセットされた後、紙幣Bの繰り出しを行うときには、モータ26が作動をする。このことにより、出力軸261が反時計回り方向に回転する。これに伴い、歯車262及び係合部271を介して、フレーム27にトルクが伝達される。付勢部材によって、時計回り方向に付勢されているフレーム27は、出力軸261を中心として反時計回り方向に回転をする。図18に一点鎖線で示すように、繰り出しベルト22が、開口部21の縁よりも装置1の右側に移動するようになる。繰り出しベルト22は、押さえ状態となった押え部24と共に、紙幣Bを挟み込むようになる。こうして繰り出しベルト22が、動作状態となる。モータ26の作動が継続することにより、繰り出しベルト22によって紙幣Bが繰り出されていく。繰り出しベルト22が動作状態となれば、トルクリミッタによって出力軸261と歯車262との間で伝達されるトルクが所定の最大トルクに制限される。これにより、フレーム27が反時計回り方向にさらに回転することが防止される。その結果、繰り出しベルト22を動作状態に維持しながら、紙幣Bの繰り出しが可能になる。
When the bill B is fed out after the bill B is set in the setting unit 2, the motor 26 operates. As a result, the output shaft 261 rotates counterclockwise. Along with this, torque is transmitted to the frame 27 through the gear 262 and the engaging portion 271. The frame 27 urged clockwise by the urging member rotates about the output shaft 261 in the counterclockwise direction. As shown by a one-dot chain line in FIG. 18, the feeding belt 22 moves to the right side of the device 1 from the edge of the opening 21. The feeding belt 22 sandwiches the bill B together with the presser portion 24 in the pressed state. In this way, the feeding belt 22 enters an operating state. As the operation of the motor 26 continues, the bill B is fed out by the feeding belt 22. When the feeding belt 22 is in the operating state, the torque transmitted between the output shaft 261 and the gear 262 by the torque limiter is limited to a predetermined maximum torque. This prevents the frame 27 from rotating further in the counterclockwise direction. As a result, the banknote B can be fed out while maintaining the feeding belt 22 in the operating state.
セット部2にセットされた紙幣Bが全て繰り出されれば、モータ26の作動が停止される。これに伴い、フレーム27は、付勢部材によって時計回り方向に付勢され、待機状態へと切り替わる。
When all the bills B set in the setting unit 2 are fed out, the operation of the motor 26 is stopped. Along with this, the frame 27 is urged clockwise by the urging member and is switched to the standby state.
このような構成を採用しても、前記構成のセット部2と同様に、紙幣Bを、開口部21を介してスムースにセット部2へ挿入することができる。
Even if such a configuration is adopted, the bill B can be smoothly inserted into the set portion 2 through the opening 21 as in the case of the set portion 2 having the above-described configuration.
(保持部の構成)
図20は、保持部4の構成を示している。保持部4は、ストッパ41と、札押さえ43とを備えている。ストッパ41は、第3搬送路53から保持部4へと、装置1の前方に搬送される紙幣Bの搬送方向の先端縁に当たって、紙幣Bの先端縁を揃える機能を果たす。ストッパ41は、図1及び図20に示すように、第2ガイド56の左側面から、装置1の左外方に突出するように取り付けられる。ストッパ41は、前後方向に広がる保持部4において、左右方向に横切るように配設される。 (Configuration of holding part)
FIG. 20 shows the configuration of the holdingunit 4. The holding unit 4 includes a stopper 41 and a bill holder 43. The stopper 41 hits the leading edge in the transport direction of the bill B transported forward from the apparatus 1 from the third transport path 53 to the holding unit 4 and fulfills the function of aligning the leading edge of the bill B. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 20, the stopper 41 is attached so as to protrude from the left side surface of the second guide 56 to the left outward of the device 1. The stopper 41 is disposed so as to cross in the left-right direction in the holding portion 4 spreading in the front-rear direction.
図20は、保持部4の構成を示している。保持部4は、ストッパ41と、札押さえ43とを備えている。ストッパ41は、第3搬送路53から保持部4へと、装置1の前方に搬送される紙幣Bの搬送方向の先端縁に当たって、紙幣Bの先端縁を揃える機能を果たす。ストッパ41は、図1及び図20に示すように、第2ガイド56の左側面から、装置1の左外方に突出するように取り付けられる。ストッパ41は、前後方向に広がる保持部4において、左右方向に横切るように配設される。 (Configuration of holding part)
FIG. 20 shows the configuration of the holding
ストッパ41は、前後方向の配設位置が変更可能となるように、第2ガイド56に取り付けられている(図20の矢印参照)。計数対象の紙幣Bのサイズ(特に長手方向の長さ)に合わせて、ストッパ41の配設位置を変更することが可能である。
The stopper 41 is attached to the 2nd guide 56 so that the arrangement position of the front-back direction can be changed (refer the arrow of FIG. 20). The arrangement position of the stopper 41 can be changed in accordance with the size of the bill B to be counted (particularly the length in the longitudinal direction).
ストッパ41はまた、その基端部が垂直方向に延びる軸周りに回転可能となるように、第2ガイド56に取り付けられている。ストッパ41は、第2ガイド56の左側面に対して、ほぼ直交するように、その側面から突出する状態から、装置1の前方に向かって回転をして第2ガイド56の左側面に沿うように倒れる状態へと変更することが可能である。ストッパ41の基端部には、ねじりばね42が取り付けられており、ねじりばね42は、ストッパ41を、図20における時計回り方向に付勢している。従って、紙幣Bの計数処理の最中等においては、ストッパ41は第2ガイド56の側面から突出するような状態となって、保持部4に搬送された紙幣Bの先端縁を揃える機能を果たす。一方、保持部4から紙幣Bを取り除くときには、ストッパ41は紙幣Bに押されて回転可能である。ストッパ41が退避をすることにより、保持部4から紙幣Bが取り出しやすくなる。
The stopper 41 is also attached to the second guide 56 so that its base end portion can be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The stopper 41 rotates from the side surface of the second guide 56 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the left side surface of the second guide 56, and then rotates toward the front of the device 1 so as to follow the left side surface of the second guide 56. It is possible to change to a state where it falls over. A torsion spring 42 is attached to the base end portion of the stopper 41, and the torsion spring 42 urges the stopper 41 in the clockwise direction in FIG. Accordingly, during the counting process of the bills B, the stopper 41 is in a state of protruding from the side surface of the second guide 56, and functions to align the leading edges of the bills B conveyed to the holding unit 4. On the other hand, when removing the banknote B from the holding part 4, the stopper 41 is pushed by the banknote B and can rotate. When the stopper 41 is retracted, the banknote B can be easily taken out from the holding portion 4.
ストッパ41において、紙幣Bの先端縁が当たる面には、上下方向に延びる溝が水平方向に多数並んで形成されている。これにより、紙幣Bの先端縁が当たる面は、のこぎり状となっている。保持部4は、紙幣Bを立てた状態で保持するが、紙幣Bの先端縁がストッパ41に設けた溝に入ることで、紙幣Bが水平方向(特に、装置1の左側方)に移動することが防止される。保持部4は、複数枚の紙幣を、水平方向に並べた状態で、一度に保持することが可能であるが、各紙幣Bの移動を防止することによって、後述する札押さえ43と共に、複数枚の紙幣Bがバラバラになってしまうことが防止される。
In the stopper 41, on the surface where the leading edge of the bill B hits, a number of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed side by side in the horizontal direction. Thereby, the surface where the front-end edge of the banknote B hits has a saw-tooth shape. The holding unit 4 holds the banknote B in an upright state, but the banknote B moves in the horizontal direction (particularly the left side of the apparatus 1) when the leading edge of the banknote B enters the groove provided in the stopper 41. It is prevented. The holding unit 4 can hold a plurality of banknotes at a time in a state where they are arranged in the horizontal direction. The bills B are prevented from falling apart.
札押さえ43は、保持部4に保持された紙幣Bの表面又は裏面を押さえて、紙幣Bを立てた状態にする機能を果たす。札押さえ43はまた、保持部4に保持された複数枚の紙幣Bを厚み方向に押さえて重ねる機能も果たす。札押さえ43は、第3ガイド57に取り付けられている。札押さえ43は、平面視でL字状に構成された第3ガイド57の前端部に取り付けられ、そこから、装置1の前方へと延びている。札押さえ43は、その基端部が垂直方向に延びる軸周りに回転可能となるように、第3ガイド57に取り付けられている。札押さえ43は、装置1の前方でかつ、第2ガイド56の側面に近づく方向に延びる状態から、第2ガイド56の側面から離れる方向へと、図20における時計回り方向に回転をすることが可能である。札押さえ43の基端部には、ねじりばね44が取り付けられており、ねじりばね44は、札押さえ43を、図20における反時計回り方向に付勢している。
The bill holder 43 functions to hold the bill B in a standing state by pressing the front or back surface of the bill B held by the holding unit 4. The bill holder 43 also has a function of pressing and stacking a plurality of banknotes B held by the holding unit 4 in the thickness direction. The bill holder 43 is attached to the third guide 57. The bill holder 43 is attached to a front end portion of a third guide 57 configured in an L shape in a plan view, and extends from there to the front of the device 1. The bill holder 43 is attached to the third guide 57 so that its base end portion can rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The bill holder 43 can rotate in the clockwise direction in FIG. 20 from the state extending in front of the device 1 and in the direction approaching the side surface of the second guide 56 to the direction away from the side surface of the second guide 56. Is possible. A torsion spring 44 is attached to the base end portion of the bill holder 43, and the torsion spring 44 biases the tag holder 43 in the counterclockwise direction in FIG.
図20から明らかなように、保持部4において第2ガイド56の左側面は、第3搬送路53よりも装置1の右側に位置している。第3搬送路53から保持部4へと搬送された紙幣Bは、図20に一点鎖線で示すように、装置1の右方へと移動しながら、前方へと移動する。札押さえ43は、第3搬送路53から保持部4へと搬送された紙幣Bを、第2ガイド56の側面の方に寄せるように紙幣Bを案内する。札押さえ43は、ストッパ41と共に、保持部4において、紙幣Bが所定の位置に保持されるようにする。また、保持部4において保持をする紙幣Bの枚数が増えたときには、反時計回り方向に付勢されている札押さえ43は、時計回り方向に回転をすることにより、保持部4において水平方向に並んで保持されている複数枚の紙幣Bの内、最も外側の紙幣Bの表面又は裏面に当たって、複数枚の紙幣Bを、第2ガイド56の側面の方に寄せて保持する。こうして、複数枚の紙幣Bを、立てた状態で安定的に保持することが可能になる。
As is clear from FIG. 20, the left side surface of the second guide 56 in the holding unit 4 is located on the right side of the apparatus 1 with respect to the third conveyance path 53. The banknote B conveyed from the 3rd conveyance path 53 to the holding | maintenance part 4 moves ahead, moving to the right side of the apparatus 1, as shown with a dashed-dotted line in FIG. The bill holder 43 guides the banknote B so that the banknote B transported from the third transport path 53 to the holding unit 4 is brought closer to the side surface of the second guide 56. The bill holder 43, together with the stopper 41, causes the bill B to be held at a predetermined position in the holding unit 4. When the number of banknotes B held in the holding unit 4 increases, the bill holder 43 biased counterclockwise rotates in the horizontal direction in the holding unit 4 by rotating clockwise. Of the plurality of banknotes B held side by side, the outermost banknote B hits the front or back surface of the outermost banknote B, and holds the plurality of banknotes B toward the side surface of the second guide 56. In this way, a plurality of banknotes B can be stably held in an upright state.
保持部4から紙幣Bを取り除くときには、札押さえ43は、紙幣Bに押されて反時計回り方向に回転することが可能である。こうして、札押さえ43が退避をすることにより、保持部4から紙幣Bが取り出しやすくなる。
When removing the bill B from the holding part 4, the bill holder 43 is pushed by the bill B and can be rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the bill holder 43 is retracted, so that the bill B can be easily taken out from the holding unit 4.
(保持部のライトアップ構造)
この装置1は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82を備えており、計数処理に関する情報は、これらの第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82に表示される。従って、担当者(又は客)は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82の表示内容を見ることによって、計数結果を始め、計数処理時にエラーが発生したことや、リジェクト紙幣が発生したこと等を認識することができる。しかしながら、計数処理が正常に終了したことや、計数処理時にエラーが発生したことや、リジェクト紙幣が発生したこと等は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82の表示内容を見なくても認識できるようにすれば、装置1の利便性が向上する。 (Light-up structure of holding part)
Theapparatus 1 includes first and second displays 81 and 82, and information related to the counting process is displayed on the first and second displays 81 and 82. Therefore, the person in charge (or the customer) sees the display contents of the first and second displays 81 and 82 to start the counting result, indicate that an error has occurred during the counting process, that a reject banknote has occurred, and the like. Can be recognized. However, it can be recognized without having to look at the display contents of the first and second displays 81 and 82 that the counting process has ended normally, an error has occurred during the counting process, a rejected banknote has occurred, and the like. By doing so, the convenience of the device 1 is improved.
この装置1は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82を備えており、計数処理に関する情報は、これらの第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82に表示される。従って、担当者(又は客)は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82の表示内容を見ることによって、計数結果を始め、計数処理時にエラーが発生したことや、リジェクト紙幣が発生したこと等を認識することができる。しかしながら、計数処理が正常に終了したことや、計数処理時にエラーが発生したことや、リジェクト紙幣が発生したこと等は、第1及び第2ディスプレイ81、82の表示内容を見なくても認識できるようにすれば、装置1の利便性が向上する。 (Light-up structure of holding part)
The
そこで、この装置1では、保持部4にライトアップ構造を設けており、計数処理が正常に終了したこと、計数処理時にエラーが発生したこと、及び、リジェクト紙幣が発生したことを、保持部4に照射するライトの色によって示すように構成されている。
Therefore, in this apparatus 1, the holding unit 4 is provided with a light-up structure, and the holding unit 4 indicates that the counting process has ended normally, an error has occurred during the counting process, and a reject banknote has been generated. It is configured as shown by the color of the light radiated.
具体的にライトアップ構造は、図21及び図22に示すように、LEDを有するLED基板45と、LED基板45から照射された光を反射するミラー46とを備えて構成されている。LED基板45は、第3ガイド57の内部に配設されており、装置1の前方に向かって光を照射するように構成されている。LED基板45は、青色、赤色及び黄色の、少なくとも3色の光を照射可能に構成されている。ミラー46は、第3ガイド57の内部において、LED基板45の前方位置に配設されている。ミラー46は、第3ガイド57に取り付けられた札押さえ43の基端部近傍に配設されている。ミラー46は、LED基板45から照射された光を、斜め前方に反射させるように、LED基板45に対して、所定の角度で配設されている。札押さえ54は、透光性の材料によって構成されており、ミラー46によって反射された光は、札押さえ54の内部を通過して、保持部4における第2ガイド56の左側面に照射される。札押さえ54の内部を光が通過する際に、光が散乱をすることで、保持部4の全体がライトアップされる。
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the light-up structure includes an LED substrate 45 having LEDs and a mirror 46 that reflects light emitted from the LED substrate 45. The LED substrate 45 is disposed inside the third guide 57 and is configured to emit light toward the front of the apparatus 1. The LED substrate 45 is configured to be capable of emitting light of at least three colors of blue, red, and yellow. The mirror 46 is disposed in front of the LED substrate 45 inside the third guide 57. The mirror 46 is disposed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the bill holder 43 attached to the third guide 57. The mirror 46 is disposed at a predetermined angle with respect to the LED substrate 45 so as to reflect light emitted from the LED substrate 45 obliquely forward. The bill holder 54 is made of a translucent material, and the light reflected by the mirror 46 passes through the inside of the tag holder 54 and is irradiated on the left side surface of the second guide 56 in the holding unit 4. . When light passes through the inside of the bill holder 54, the light is scattered, so that the entire holding unit 4 is lit up.
制御部6は、紙幣の計数処理の状態に応じて、保持部4をライトアップする色を変更する。具体的に、紙幣の計数処理が正常に終了したときには、LED基板45から青色の光を照射させるようにして、保持部4を青色の光でライトアップする。担当者は、保持部4が青色でライトアップされたことを見て、瞬時に、計数処理が正常に終了したことを認識することが可能になる。従って、第1又は第2ディスプレイ81、82を見て、計数結果を確認すると共に、速やかに保持部4から紙幣Bを取り出すことが可能になる。こうして、計数処理の効率化を図ることができる。
The control unit 6 changes the color to light up the holding unit 4 according to the state of the bill counting process. Specifically, when the bill counting process is normally completed, the holding unit 4 is lit up with blue light so that the LED substrate 45 emits blue light. The person in charge can instantly recognize that the counting process has been completed normally by seeing that the holding unit 4 is lit up in blue. Therefore, it is possible to check the counting result by looking at the first or second display 81 or 82 and to quickly remove the bill B from the holding unit 4. In this way, the efficiency of the counting process can be improved.
制御部6はまた、紙幣の計数処理の最中にリジェクト紙幣が発生したときには、LED基板45から黄色の光を照射させるようにして、保持部4を黄色の光でライトアップする。前述したように、リジェクト紙幣が発生したときには、そのリジェクト紙幣が、リジェクト口54aから飛び出した状態で、装置1が停止をするが、担当者は、保持部4が黄色でライトアップされたことを見て、瞬時に、リジェクト紙幣が発生をして、計数処理が停止していることを認識することが可能になる。従って、担当者は、速やかにリジェクト部54から紙幣Bを取り出して、計数処理を、速やかに再開することができる。
The control unit 6 also illuminates the holding unit 4 with yellow light so that yellow light is emitted from the LED substrate 45 when a reject bill is generated during the bill counting process. As described above, when a reject banknote is generated, the apparatus 1 stops with the reject banknote protruding from the reject port 54a, but the person in charge confirms that the holding unit 4 is lit up in yellow. As a result, it becomes possible to instantly recognize that reject bills are generated and the counting process is stopped. Therefore, the person in charge can quickly take out the banknote B from the reject unit 54 and can quickly restart the counting process.
制御部6はさらに、例えば計数処理の最中に紙幣Bの詰まりが生じたといった、エラーが発生して、装置1が停止したときには、LED基板45から赤色の光を照射させるようにして、保持部4を赤色の光でライトアップする。担当者は、保持部4が赤色でライトアップされたことを見て、瞬時に、エラーが発生をして、装置1が停止していることを認識することが可能になる。従って、担当者は、速やかにエラーの解除を開始することができる。
The control unit 6 further holds the LED board 45 so that red light is emitted from the LED board 45 when an error occurs, for example, the banknote B is clogged during the counting process. Light up part 4 with red light. The person in charge can recognize that the error has occurred and the apparatus 1 is stopped instantaneously when the holding unit 4 is lit up in red. Therefore, the person in charge can immediately start releasing the error.
こうして保持部4のライトアップを行うことにより、計数処理の効率化を図ることが可能になる。保持部4は、計数処理の終了時に紙幣Bが保持される箇所であるため、担当者(及び客)は、保持部4に目が行きやすい。保持部4をライトアップすることは、担当者に対し、装置1の状態を速やかに知らせる上で、有効である。但し、装置1においてライトアップを行う箇所は、保持部4に限定されるものではない。例えばセット部2をライトアップするようにしてもよい。
Thus, by performing the light-up of the holding unit 4, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the counting process. Since the holding unit 4 is a place where the bill B is held at the end of the counting process, the person in charge (and the customer) can easily see the holding unit 4. Lighting up the holding unit 4 is effective for promptly informing the person in charge of the state of the apparatus 1. However, the place where the light-up is performed in the apparatus 1 is not limited to the holding unit 4. For example, the set unit 2 may be lit up.
また、リジェクト部54にもライトアップ構造を設け、リジェクト紙幣が発生したときには、そのリジェクト部54のライトアップ構造によって、リジェクト部54をライトアップするようにしてもよい。こうすることで、担当者に対して、リジェクト紙幣の取り出しが必要であることを、直接的に認識させることが可能になる。
Also, a light-up structure may be provided in the reject unit 54, and when a reject banknote is generated, the reject unit 54 may be lighted up by the light-up structure of the reject unit 54. By doing so, it becomes possible for the person in charge to directly recognize that the rejection of the reject banknote is necessary.
さらに、搬送部5の搬送路に沿って、複数のLEDを埋め込んでおいてもよい。この構成では、紙幣Bの搬送にあわせてLEDを順次点灯させるようにしてもよい。また、紙幣Bが搬送路において詰まったときには、その詰まりが生じた箇所のLEDを点灯させるようにしてもよい。
Furthermore, a plurality of LEDs may be embedded along the conveyance path of the conveyance unit 5. In this structure, you may make it light up LED sequentially according to conveyance of the banknote B. FIG. Further, when the banknote B is jammed in the transport path, the LED at the location where the jam has occurred may be turned on.
また、計数処理の終了時等にライトアップをするだけでなく、装置1の待機状態においても、ライトアップをするようにしてもよい。例えば計数処理の実行が可能であるといった、装置1のスタンバイ状態を、ライトアップの色によって知らせるようにしてもよい。
Further, not only the light-up is performed at the end of the counting process, but the light-up may also be performed in the standby state of the apparatus 1. For example, the standby state of the apparatus 1 that the counting process can be executed may be notified by the color of light up.
さらに、装置1の計数処理の最中に、処理中であることを、例えば点滅等によってライトアップするようにしてもよい。
Further, during the counting process of the device 1, it may be lit up by flashing, for example, to indicate that it is being processed.
さらに、保持部4をライトアップするためのLED基板45を、第3ガイド57の内部に配設するのではなく、第2ガイド56の側面に埋め込むようにしてもよい。
Furthermore, the LED substrate 45 for illuminating the holding unit 4 may be embedded in the side surface of the second guide 56 instead of being disposed inside the third guide 57.
(コネクタの構成)
以下に、電源コードや、ケーブルが接続されるコネクタ7の構成について説明する。 (Connector configuration)
The configuration of the power cord and theconnector 7 to which the cable is connected will be described below.
以下に、電源コードや、ケーブルが接続されるコネクタ7の構成について説明する。 (Connector configuration)
The configuration of the power cord and the
前述したように、装置1(つまり、本体)の前部右側には、セット部2が配置されている。装置1の前部左側には、保持部4が配置されている。セット部2及び保持部4は、双方とも、装置1の上部11に設けられている。セット部2及び保持部4は、装置1の前部において、水平方向に並んで位置している。
As described above, the set unit 2 is arranged on the front right side of the device 1 (that is, the main body). On the left side of the front part of the device 1, a holding part 4 is arranged. Both the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4 are provided in the upper part 11 of the apparatus 1. The set part 2 and the holding part 4 are positioned side by side in the horizontal direction at the front part of the apparatus 1.
装置1の下部12は、図1等に示すように左右方向の長さよりも前後の長さが長い略直方状の外形を有している。図23に示すように、コネクタ7は、この下部12を前側と後側とに2等分したときの前側に設けられている。したがって、コネクタ7は、セット部2及び保持部4と同様に、装置1の前部に配置されることになる。
The lower part 12 of the apparatus 1 has a substantially rectangular outer shape whose front and rear length is longer than the length in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 23, the connector 7 is provided on the front side when the lower part 12 is divided into two equal parts, the front side and the rear side. Therefore, the connector 7 is disposed at the front portion of the device 1 in the same manner as the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4.
コネクタ7は、下部12の前面に設けられている。コネクタ7は、電源コード、USBケーブル、LANケーブル及びRS232Cケーブルを接続することができるように構成されている。コネクタ7に接続された電線71は、装置1の前面から前方に延びて配設される。
The connector 7 is provided on the front surface of the lower part 12. The connector 7 is configured to connect a power cord, a USB cable, a LAN cable, and an RS232C cable. The electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 is disposed so as to extend forward from the front surface of the device 1.
第1ディスプレイ81は、図1、及び図23においては仮想的に示すように、装置1の前部において、コネクタ7の上方位置に取り付けられている。第1ディスプレイ81は、例えば液晶パネルを有している。第1ディスプレイ81の上端部は、装置1の前面において、セット部2及び保持部4と、コネクタ7との間に取り付けられている。
1st display 81 is attached to the upper part of connector 7 in the front part of device 1, as shown virtually in Drawing 1 and Drawing 23. The first display 81 has a liquid crystal panel, for example. The upper end of the first display 81 is attached between the set unit 2 and the holding unit 4 and the connector 7 on the front surface of the device 1.
第1ディスプレイ81は、上端から下端に向かうに連れて前方の斜め下方に傾斜している。コネクタ7は、第1ディスプレイ81によって、上方から覆われる。装置1を卓70の上に置いたときに、コネクタ7は、第1ディスプレイ81によって隠れる。
The first display 81 is inclined obliquely downward and forward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. The connector 7 is covered from above by the first display 81. When the device 1 is placed on the table 70, the connector 7 is hidden by the first display 81.
装置1は、図23に示すように、例えば卓70の上の縁の近くで、装置1の前部を担当者の方に向けて置かれる。
As shown in FIG. 23, the device 1 is placed, for example, near the upper edge of the table 70 with the front portion of the device 1 facing the person in charge.
コネクタ7に接続された電線71は、装置1の前面から前方に向かって延ばすことが可能になる。電線71はそのまま、卓70の縁から下方に向かって延ばすことが可能になる。
The electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 can be extended forward from the front surface of the device 1. The electric wire 71 can be extended downward from the edge of the table 70 as it is.
以上説明したように、前記の装置1は、電線71が接続されるコネクタ7を、装置1の前側に設けたから、電線71を、担当者に向かって延ばして、卓上に置くことが可能になる。そのことで、電線71が卓上で邪魔にならない。
As described above, since the device 1 is provided with the connector 7 to which the electric wire 71 is connected on the front side of the device 1, the electric wire 71 can be extended toward the person in charge and placed on the table. . As a result, the electric wire 71 does not get in the way on the desktop.
また、コネクタ7を、担当者の方に向けることで、このコネクタ7に対する電線71の着脱も、容易になる。
In addition, by directing the connector 7 toward the person in charge, the electric wire 71 can be easily attached to and detached from the connector 7.
また、セット部2と保持部4とが、上部11の前部において、水平方向に並んでいるから、セット部2に紙幣を置いた担当者が、そのままの体勢で、保持部4から紙幣を取り出すことができるようになる。
Moreover, since the set part 2 and the holding | maintenance part 4 are located in a line with the horizontal direction in the front part of the upper part 11, the person in charge who set | placed the banknote on the set part 2 is the same as it is, and the banknote from the holding | maintenance part 4 It can be taken out.
また、コネクタ7の上方に第1ディスプレイ81を配置したから、コネクタ7を、第1ディスプレイ81によって隠すことができる。
Further, since the first display 81 is arranged above the connector 7, the connector 7 can be hidden by the first display 81.
また、第1ディスプレイ81は、セット部2及び保持部4と、コネクタ7との間に取り付けられているから、コネクタ7を隠しつつも、担当者がセット部2に紙幣を置いたり、保持部4から紙幣を取り出したり、するときに、第1ディスプレイ81が邪魔にならない。
Moreover, since the 1st display 81 is attached between the set part 2 and the holding | maintenance part 4, and the connector 7, a person in charge puts a banknote in the set part 2, or a holding part, concealing the connector 7. The first display 81 does not get in the way when the bills are taken out from 4.
-コネクタに関する他の形態-
尚、前記の構成では、コネクタ7は、装置1における下部12の前面に設けられていたが、コネクタ7は、下部12の左側面の前側に設けるようにしてもよいし、右側面の前側に設けるようにしてもよい。コネクタ7を、装置1における担当者に近い側に設けることによって、コネクタ7に接続された電線71が、卓上において邪魔にならない。 -Other forms of connectors-
In the above configuration, theconnector 7 is provided on the front surface of the lower portion 12 in the apparatus 1. However, the connector 7 may be provided on the front side of the left side surface of the lower portion 12 or on the front side of the right side surface. You may make it provide. By providing the connector 7 on the side close to the person in charge in the apparatus 1, the electric wire 71 connected to the connector 7 does not get in the way on the desktop.
尚、前記の構成では、コネクタ7は、装置1における下部12の前面に設けられていたが、コネクタ7は、下部12の左側面の前側に設けるようにしてもよいし、右側面の前側に設けるようにしてもよい。コネクタ7を、装置1における担当者に近い側に設けることによって、コネクタ7に接続された電線71が、卓上において邪魔にならない。 -Other forms of connectors-
In the above configuration, the
また、前記の構成では、セット部2と保持部4とが、双方とも、装置1の前部に設けられていた。これとは異なり、セット部2を装置1の前部に設け、保持部4を装置1の後部に設けてもよい。この構成では、セット部2が設けられた装置1の前部に、コネクタ7を設けることが望ましい。また、保持部4を装置1の前部に設け、セット部2を装置1の後部に設けてもよい。この構成では、保持部4が設けられた装置1の前部に、コネクタ7を設けることが望ましい。
In the above configuration, both the setting unit 2 and the holding unit 4 are provided in the front part of the apparatus 1. Alternatively, the setting unit 2 may be provided at the front part of the device 1 and the holding unit 4 may be provided at the rear part of the device 1. In this configuration, it is desirable to provide the connector 7 at the front part of the device 1 provided with the set part 2. Further, the holding unit 4 may be provided at the front part of the device 1 and the set unit 2 may be provided at the rear part of the device 1. In this configuration, it is desirable to provide the connector 7 at the front of the device 1 provided with the holding unit 4.
(ディスプレイの構成)
上述したとおり、装置1は、少なくとも紙幣の計数結果が表示される複数のディスプレイ81,82を備えている。これにより例えば、第1ディスプレイ81は主に担当者が見るためのディスプレイとし、第2ディスプレイ82は主に客が見るためのディスプレイとすることによって、担当者と客の両方が紙幣の計数結果を容易に確認することができる。なお、複数のディスプレイはそれぞれ、例えば4インチ以上であることが好ましい。 (Display configuration)
As described above, thedevice 1 includes a plurality of displays 81 and 82 on which at least the counting result of banknotes is displayed. Thus, for example, the first display 81 is mainly a display for the person in charge to see, and the second display 82 is mainly a display for the customer to see, so that both the person in charge and the customer can count the bill counting results. It can be easily confirmed. Each of the plurality of displays is preferably 4 inches or more, for example.
上述したとおり、装置1は、少なくとも紙幣の計数結果が表示される複数のディスプレイ81,82を備えている。これにより例えば、第1ディスプレイ81は主に担当者が見るためのディスプレイとし、第2ディスプレイ82は主に客が見るためのディスプレイとすることによって、担当者と客の両方が紙幣の計数結果を容易に確認することができる。なお、複数のディスプレイはそれぞれ、例えば4インチ以上であることが好ましい。 (Display configuration)
As described above, the
図24は第2ディスプレイ82が取り付けられた箇所周辺の拡大図である。図24に示すように、複数のディスプレイの1つである第2ディスプレイ82は、装置1に、ディスプレイ支持部83を介して取り付けられている。ディスプレイ支持部83は、上下方向に延びる支軸84と、支軸84に第2ディスプレイ82を固定するマウント部85とを備えている。ディスプレイ支持部83は装置1に設けられた機構86に設置されている。ここでは機構86は、支軸84が挿入される構成になっている。
FIG. 24 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the place where the second display 82 is attached. As shown in FIG. 24, the second display 82 that is one of the plurality of displays is attached to the apparatus 1 via a display support portion 83. The display support portion 83 includes a support shaft 84 that extends in the vertical direction and a mount portion 85 that fixes the second display 82 to the support shaft 84. The display support unit 83 is installed in a mechanism 86 provided in the apparatus 1. Here, the mechanism 86 is configured such that the support shaft 84 is inserted.
そして、支軸84は、軸方向すなわち上下方向に所定範囲内で伸縮自在であり、かつ、軸周りに回転自在に構成されている。これにより、第2ディスプレイ82の高さを自由に調整することができ、また、左右方向(水平方向)における第2ディスプレイ82の向きを自由に調整することができる。また、マウント部85は、支軸84に対する第2ディスプレイ82の取り付け角度を調整自在に構成されている。これにより、上下方向における第2ディスプレイ82の向きを自由に調整することができる。すなわち、ディスプレイ支持部83は、第2ディスプレイ82について、高さ、並びに、上下方向および左右方向における向きを調整可能なように構成されている。なお、ディスプレイ支持部83の構成はここに示したものに限られるものではなく、ディスプレイについて、高さ、並びに、上下方向および左右方向における向きを調整できる構成であれば、どのようなものであってもかまわない。
The support shaft 84 is configured to be expandable and contractable within a predetermined range in the axial direction, that is, the vertical direction, and is configured to be rotatable around the axis. Thereby, the height of the second display 82 can be freely adjusted, and the direction of the second display 82 in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) can be freely adjusted. Further, the mount portion 85 is configured to be capable of adjusting the mounting angle of the second display 82 with respect to the support shaft 84. Thereby, the direction of the 2nd display 82 in an up-down direction can be adjusted freely. That is, the display support portion 83 is configured to be able to adjust the height and the orientation in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction of the second display 82. The configuration of the display support portion 83 is not limited to that shown here, and any configuration can be used as long as the display can be adjusted in height and in the vertical and horizontal directions. It doesn't matter.
また、上述した構成では、ディスプレイ支持部83を設置可能な機構86が、装置1の後部右隅に1個だけ設けられているものとしたが、ディスプレイ支持部83を設置可能な機構を複数、設けてもよい。そして、この複数の機構の中から、ディスプレイ支持部83を設置する機構を選択することによって、第2ディスプレイ82の取り付け位置を容易に変更可能になる。
Further, in the configuration described above, only one mechanism 86 capable of installing the display support portion 83 is provided at the rear right corner of the apparatus 1, but a plurality of mechanisms capable of installing the display support portion 83 are provided. It may be provided. And the attachment position of the 2nd display 82 can be easily changed by selecting the mechanism which installs the display support part 83 from these several mechanisms.
図25は紙幣計数装置の他の構成を示す平面図である。図25の構成では、機構86の他に、ディスプレイ支持部83を設置可能な機構86a,86b,86cが設けられている。機構86aは装置1の後部左隅に、機構86bは左側面前方に、機構86cは右側面前方に、それぞれ設けられている。機構86,86a,86b,86cの中からディスプレイ支持部83を設置する機構を選択することによって、第2ディスプレイ82の取り付け位置を容易に変更することができる。
FIG. 25 is a plan view showing another configuration of the bill counting apparatus. In the configuration of FIG. 25, in addition to the mechanism 86, mechanisms 86 a, 86 b and 86 c on which the display support portion 83 can be installed are provided. The mechanism 86a is provided at the rear left corner of the apparatus 1, the mechanism 86b is provided in front of the left side, and the mechanism 86c is provided in front of the right side. The attachment position of the second display 82 can be easily changed by selecting a mechanism for installing the display support portion 83 from among the mechanisms 86, 86a, 86b, 86c.
また図26に示すように、装置1は、複数のディスプレイの1つである第1ディスプレイ81が本体に着脱可能なように構成されていてもよい。例えば、装置1の後部にトルクヒンジによって固定された支持片87a,87bが設けられており、第1ディスプレイ81の背面に設けられた爪部88a,88bを支持片87a,87bに引っかけて固定する構成とする。第1ディスプレイ81を装置1から外したとき、支持片87a,87bは装置1から取り外すことができるのが好ましい。また、爪部88a,88bは、第1ディスプレイ81に着脱可能に構成されているのが好ましい。なお図26の構成の場合、第1ディスプレイ81は、装置1本体から取り外した状態でも動作可能である必要がある。このため例えば、第1ディスプレイ81に電源として充電池を内蔵させたり、あるいは、第1ディスプレイ81を電源線で装置1本体と接続したりすればよい。また、信号の送受信のために、第1ディスプレイ81を無線または有線で装置1本体と通信可能な構成にすればよい。
As shown in FIG. 26, the apparatus 1 may be configured such that a first display 81, which is one of a plurality of displays, can be attached to and detached from the main body. For example, support pieces 87a and 87b fixed by a torque hinge are provided at the rear part of the device 1, and claw portions 88a and 88b provided on the back surface of the first display 81 are hooked and fixed to the support pieces 87a and 87b. The configuration. When the first display 81 is removed from the device 1, the support pieces 87 a and 87 b are preferably removable from the device 1. Further, the claw portions 88a and 88b are preferably configured to be detachable from the first display 81. In the case of the configuration shown in FIG. 26, the first display 81 needs to be operable even when it is detached from the main body of the apparatus 1. Therefore, for example, a rechargeable battery may be built in the first display 81 as a power source, or the first display 81 may be connected to the main body of the apparatus 1 with a power line. Moreover, what is necessary is just to make the 1st display 81 communicable with the apparatus 1 main body by radio | wireless or a wire for transmission / reception of a signal.
図26のような構成により、第1ディスプレイ81を装置1本体に対して容易に着脱することが可能になる。したがって、担当者は第1ディスプレイ81を装置1本体から取り外した状態で例えばタッチパネル操作等ができるので、担当者の操作性が向上する。また、支持片87a,87bがトルクヒンジによって装置1に固定されているので、第1ディスプレイ81を取り付けたとき、上下方向における角度を自由に調整することができる。なお、ディスプレイを取り付ける構成はここに示したものに限られるものではなく、ディスプレイが本体に着脱可能であれば、どのようなものであってもかまわない。また、第1ディスプレイ81は装置1にネジ止めで固定するようにしてもよい。
26, the first display 81 can be easily attached to and detached from the apparatus 1 main body. Accordingly, since the person in charge can perform, for example, a touch panel operation with the first display 81 removed from the main body of the apparatus 1, the operability of the person in charge is improved. Moreover, since the support pieces 87a and 87b are being fixed to the apparatus 1 with the torque hinge, when the 1st display 81 is attached, the angle in an up-down direction can be adjusted freely. In addition, the structure which attaches a display is not restricted to what was shown here, What kind of thing may be sufficient if a display is removable to a main body. The first display 81 may be fixed to the device 1 with screws.
なお、上述した紙幣計数装置1の構成はあくまでも一例であり、複数のディスプレイを備えた紙幣計数装置の構成はここで説明したものに限られるものではない。例えば、ディスプレイの設置位置、構造例えばタッチパネルか否かなど、または、担当者向けか客向けか、などについては、ここで開示されたものに限られるものではない。またここでは、2つのディスプレイを備えた装置構成について説明したが、3つ以上のディスプレイを備えた装置構成としてもかまわない。
In addition, the structure of the banknote counting apparatus 1 mentioned above is an example to the last, and the structure of the banknote counting apparatus provided with the some display is not restricted to what was demonstrated here. For example, the installation position of the display, whether it is a touch panel or not, or whether it is for a person in charge or for a customer is not limited to that disclosed here. Although the device configuration including two displays has been described here, a device configuration including three or more displays may be used.
(交換チップパターンの表示)
本実施形態に係る装置1は、例えば、チップを用いた遊技を行う遊技場に設置されるものとする。そして、装置1は、紙幣の計数値が表す金額と交換可能であるチップの組合せ(以下、チップ交換パターンという)を、画面表示部に表示可能に構成されている。これにより、遊技の担当者は、紙幣とチップとの交換作業を、素早くかつ正確に実行することができる。 (Display of replacement chip pattern)
For example, thedevice 1 according to the present embodiment is installed in a game hall where a game using chips is performed. And the apparatus 1 is comprised so that the combination of the chip | tip which can be exchanged with the money amount which the count value of a banknote (henceforth a chip exchange pattern) is displayed on a screen display part. Thereby, the person in charge of a game can perform the exchange operation | work with a banknote and a chip | tip quickly and correctly.
本実施形態に係る装置1は、例えば、チップを用いた遊技を行う遊技場に設置されるものとする。そして、装置1は、紙幣の計数値が表す金額と交換可能であるチップの組合せ(以下、チップ交換パターンという)を、画面表示部に表示可能に構成されている。これにより、遊技の担当者は、紙幣とチップとの交換作業を、素早くかつ正確に実行することができる。 (Display of replacement chip pattern)
For example, the
図27は装置1においてチップ交換パターンの表示に関連する機能構成を示すブロック図である。チップ交換パターンの表示に直接関連しない構成については、図示を省略している。図27に示すように、装置1は、担当者などのユーザによる操作入力が行われる操作入力部66、外部との通信を制御する通信制御部67、および、画面表示部(本実施形態では第1ディスプレイ81および第2ディスプレイ82)の表示内容を制御する画面制御部68を備えている。操作入力部66は、本実施形態では、担当者用の画面表示部である第1ディスプレイ81に設けられたタッチパネルによって実現されている。ただしこれに限られるものではなく、例えば、装置1本体に設けられたスイッチ類や操作パネルによって実現されてもよい。通信制御部67および画面制御部68は、本実施形態では、上述した制御部6の1つの機能として実現されており、例えば、マイクロコンピュータとプログラムの組合せによって実現される。ただしこれに限られるものではなく、制御部6とは独立したシステムLSI等によって実現されてもよい。
FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration related to the display of the chip replacement pattern in the apparatus 1. A configuration that is not directly related to the display of the chip replacement pattern is not shown. As shown in FIG. 27, the apparatus 1 includes an operation input unit 66 that receives an operation input by a user such as a person in charge, a communication control unit 67 that controls communication with the outside, and a screen display unit (in this embodiment, A screen control unit 68 for controlling display contents of the first display 81 and the second display 82). In this embodiment, the operation input unit 66 is realized by a touch panel provided on the first display 81 that is a screen display unit for a person in charge. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be realized by switches or an operation panel provided in the main body of the apparatus 1. In this embodiment, the communication control unit 67 and the screen control unit 68 are realized as one function of the control unit 6 described above, and are realized by, for example, a combination of a microcomputer and a program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be realized by a system LSI or the like independent of the control unit 6.
そして装置1は、例えば、遊技場を集中管理している上位サーバー100と、コネクタ7を介して通信可能なように接続されている。通信制御部67は、上位サーバー100から、チップ交換パターン生成の条件となる情報を受信し、画面制御部68に送る。チップ交換パターン生成の条件とは例えば、チップを用いた遊技における利用単位金額の最小値および最大値や、チップの金額の種類を示す金種情報等である。上位サーバー100は、例えば遊技場の営業開始前に、装置1に、当該装置1が置かれたテーブルにおけるチップ交換パターン生成の条件となる情報を送信する。例えばここでは、利用単位金額の最小値$25、最大値$1000、チップの金種$25,$50,$100といった情報を、装置1に送信する。
And the apparatus 1 is connected so that it can communicate with the high-order server 100 which manages the game hall centrally via the connector 7, for example. The communication control unit 67 receives information serving as a condition for generating a chip exchange pattern from the upper server 100 and sends it to the screen control unit 68. The conditions for generating the chip exchange pattern are, for example, the minimum and maximum values of the usage unit amount in the game using the chip, denomination information indicating the type of the chip amount, and the like. For example, the host server 100 transmits to the device 1 information that serves as a condition for generating a chip replacement pattern in the table on which the device 1 is placed before the game hall starts business. For example, here, information such as a minimum value $ 25, a maximum value $ 1000, and a chip denomination $ 25, $ 50, $ 100 is transmitted to the apparatus 1.
装置1が紙幣を計数すると、画面制御部68は、当該計数値に対応するチップ交換パターンを生成し、第1ディスプレイ81および第2ディスプレイ82に表示する。チップ交換パターンの生成は、上位サーバー100から事前に送信された情報を基にして、自動的に行われる。このときの演算処理は例えば、公知の両替アルゴリズムによって実行可能である。なお、後述するように、画面に表示するチップ交換パターンは、複数種類であってもよいし、単独であってもよい。本実施形態では、画面制御部68は、複数種類のチップ交換パターンを、併せて画面に表示する候補表示モードを有している。また、チップ交換パターンの表示は、例えば操作入力部66の操作を受けたタイミングで、実行される。
When the device 1 counts banknotes, the screen control unit 68 generates a chip exchange pattern corresponding to the count value and displays it on the first display 81 and the second display 82. The generation of the chip exchange pattern is automatically performed based on the information transmitted in advance from the upper server 100. The arithmetic processing at this time can be executed by, for example, a known exchange algorithm. As will be described later, the chip exchange pattern displayed on the screen may be a plurality of types or a single type. In the present embodiment, the screen control unit 68 has a candidate display mode for displaying a plurality of types of chip replacement patterns together on the screen. The display of the chip replacement pattern is executed, for example, at the timing when the operation input unit 66 is operated.
紙幣とチップの交換が行われると、通信制御部67は、交換した紙幣の金種とその枚数の情報を上位サーバー100に送信する。これにより、遊技場は、入金情報を容易に一元管理することができる。
When the exchange of bills and chips is performed, the communication control unit 67 transmits information on the denomination and number of the exchanged bills to the upper server 100. Thereby, the game hall can easily manage the deposit information.
図28A~図28Cは画面表示の例である。図28A~図28Cの画面は第1ディスプレイ81に表示されることを想定している。なお、客用の表示画面である第2ディスプレイ82にも同様の表示がなされるが、第2ディスプレイ82にはタッチパネルが設けられていないので、タッチ用ボタンは表示されない。
28A to 28C are examples of screen display. 28A to 28C are assumed to be displayed on the first display 81. Although the same display is made on the second display 82 which is a display screen for customers, the touch panel is not provided on the second display 82, so no touch button is displayed.
図28Aは紙幣を計数したときの画面表示の例であり、計数値D1として「$800」が表示されている。D2は通貨表示であり、図では香港ドルの通貨コード「HKD」が表示されている。D3は承認ボタンであり、計数結果が客に承認されたとき、担当者が承認ボタンD3を押す(タッチする)ことによって、チップ交換パターンの表示画面に切り替わる。
FIG. 28A is an example of a screen display when banknotes are counted, and “$ 800” is displayed as the count value D1. D2 is a currency display, and in the figure, the currency code “HKD” of Hong Kong dollar is displayed. D3 is an approval button. When the counting result is approved by the customer, the person in charge presses (touches) the approval button D3 to switch to the display screen of the chip exchange pattern.
図28Bはチップ交換パターンの表示画面の例であり、複数種類(図では4種類)のチップ交換パターンC1~C4が表示されている。すなわち、図28Bは上述した候補表示モードの一例である。なお、チップ交換パターンには様々なものが存在するため、生成アルゴズムに所定の制約条件を与えることによって、特徴のあるチップ交換パターンを生成することができる。
FIG. 28B shows an example of a chip exchange pattern display screen, in which plural types (four types in the figure) of chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 are displayed. That is, FIG. 28B is an example of the candidate display mode described above. Since various chip exchange patterns exist, a characteristic chip exchange pattern can be generated by giving a predetermined constraint condition to the generation algorithm.
例えば、チップ交換パターンC1は、「最少額のチップのみを用いる」という制約条件を与えたものである。これにより、ここでの最少額である$25チップのみからなるチップ交換パターンC1が生成されている。チップ交換パターンC2は、「少額のチップ2種類のみを用いる」&「チップ毎の合計金額のばらつきが最小」という制約条件を与えたものである。これにより、$25と$50のチップからなり、チップ毎の合計金額がともに$400であるチップ交換パターンC2が生成されている。チップ交換パターンC3は、「交換可能な全てのチップを用いる」&「少額チップを優先する」という制約条件を与えたものである。これにより、$100チップ1枚、$50チップ2枚、$25チップ24枚というチップ交換パターンC3が生成されている。チップ交換パターンC4は、「交換可能な全てのチップを用いる」&「チップ毎の合計金額のばらつきが所定値以下」という制約条件を与えたものである。これにより、$100チップ3枚、$50チップ5枚、$25チップ10枚という、比較的バランスがとれたチップ交換パターンC4が生成されている。
For example, the chip replacement pattern C1 is given a constraint that “use only the minimum amount of chips”. As a result, a chip replacement pattern C1 including only $ 25 chips, which is the minimum amount here, is generated. The chip replacement pattern C2 is provided with the constraint that “only two types of small chips are used” & “the variation in the total amount of money for each chip is minimum”. As a result, a chip exchange pattern C2 is generated that includes chips of $ 25 and $ 50, and the total amount for each chip is $ 400. The chip replacement pattern C3 is provided with a constraint condition of “use all replaceable chips” & “prioritize small amount chips”. As a result, a chip exchange pattern C3 of 1 $ 100 chip, 2 $ 50 chips, and 24 $ 25 chips is generated. The chip replacement pattern C4 is provided with a constraint that “use all replaceable chips” & “the variation in the total amount of money for each chip is a predetermined value or less”. As a result, a relatively well-balanced chip exchange pattern C4 of three $ 100 chips, five $ 50 chips, and ten $ 25 chips is generated.
図28Cは選択されたチップ交換パターンの表示画面の例であり、図28Bの画面からチップ交換パターンC4が選択された場合を示している。図28Cでは、チップ交換パターンC4が画面に単独で表示されている。また、直観で分かりやすいように、現実のチップを模したイラストが用いられている。チップ交換パターンを分かりやすく表示するためには例えば、各チップの表示を、当該チップの現実の色に合わせて行えばよい。
FIG. 28C is an example of a display screen of the selected chip replacement pattern, and shows a case where the chip replacement pattern C4 is selected from the screen of FIG. 28B. In FIG. 28C, the chip replacement pattern C4 is displayed alone on the screen. In addition, illustrations imitating real chips are used to make it intuitive and easy to understand. In order to display the chip replacement pattern in an easy-to-understand manner, for example, each chip may be displayed in accordance with the actual color of the chip.
図29は紙幣計数からチップ交換までにおける、装置1およびこれを操作する担当者の動作の例を示すフローチャートである。まず、担当者は、チップ交換を求める客から紙幣を受け取ると(S11)、この紙幣を装置1のセット部2にセットし、計数を実行する(S12)。計数が終了すると、装置1は第1ディスプレイ81および第2ディスプレイ82に計数結果を表示する(S13)。このときの画面は、例えば図28Aのようになる。
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the operation of the apparatus 1 and the person in charge operating it from the bill counting to the chip exchange. First, when a person in charge receives a banknote from a customer seeking chip replacement (S11), the person in charge sets the banknote in the setting unit 2 of the apparatus 1 and executes counting (S12). When the counting is completed, the device 1 displays the counting result on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S13). The screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28A, for example.
担当者は、計数が終了した紙幣を、例えば遊技場に設置された回収ボックスに入れ、計数結果を承認する(S14)。ここでの承認は例えば、図28Aの画面における承認ボタンD3をタッチすることによって行われる。すると、装置1は、第1ディスプレイ81および第2ディスプレイ82にチップ交換パターンを表示する(S15)。このときの画面は、例えば図28Bのようになる。客は、客用の表示画面である第2ディスプレイ82を見て、希望するチップ交換パターンを担当者に告げる。担当者は、客の指示に従ってチップ交換パターンを選択する(S16)。ここでは担当者は、担当者用の表示画面である第1ディスプレイ81に対して、客が告げたチップ交換パターンの位置をタッチする。
The person in charge puts the counted banknote into, for example, a collection box installed in the amusement hall, and approves the counting result (S14). The approval here is performed, for example, by touching the approval button D3 on the screen of FIG. 28A. Then, the device 1 displays the chip replacement pattern on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S15). The screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28B, for example. The customer looks at the second display 82 which is a display screen for the customer and tells the person in charge the desired chip replacement pattern. The person in charge selects a chip replacement pattern according to the customer's instruction (S16). Here, the person in charge touches the position of the chip replacement pattern notified by the customer on the first display 81 which is a display screen for the person in charge.
装置1は、選択されたチップ交換パターンを、第1ディスプレイ81および第2ディスプレイ82に表示する(S17)。このときの画面は、例えば図28Cのようになる。担当者は、表示されたチップ交換パターンに従って、客にチップを渡す(S18)。なお、計数値に対してチップ交換時に端数が出る場合は、その端数の金額もチップ交換パターンと併せて画面に表示し、客にチップを渡す際にその金額を返すようにすればよい。
The apparatus 1 displays the selected chip replacement pattern on the first display 81 and the second display 82 (S17). The screen at this time is as shown in FIG. 28C, for example. The person in charge delivers the chip to the customer according to the displayed chip replacement pattern (S18). If a fraction is given to the count value at the time of chip exchange, the amount of the fraction may be displayed on the screen together with the chip exchange pattern so that the amount is returned when the chip is delivered to the customer.
このように本実施形態によると、紙幣の計数値を表示するための第1および第2ディスプレイ81,82に、画面制御部68の制御によって、紙幣の計数値D1が表す金額と交換可能であるチップの組合せを示すチップ交換パターンC1~C4を表示することができる。このため、当該装置1が、例えばチップを用いた遊技を行う遊技場に設置された場合に、遊技の担当者が、紙幣とチップとの交換作業を、素早くかつ正確に実行することができる。また、チップ交換パターンC1~C4が、遊技における利用単位金額の最小値および最大値とチップの金額の種類を示す金種情報とを用いて生成されるので、当該装置1は、状況に応じた的確なチップ交換パターンC1~C4を表示することができる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first and second displays 81 and 82 for displaying the count value of the banknote can be exchanged for the amount of money represented by the count value D1 of the banknote under the control of the screen control unit 68. Chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 indicating the combination of chips can be displayed. For this reason, when the apparatus 1 is installed, for example, in a game arcade where a game using chips is performed, the person in charge of the game can quickly and accurately perform the exchange operation of bills and chips. In addition, since the chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 are generated using the minimum and maximum values of the usage unit amount in the game and the denomination information indicating the type of the amount of the chip, the device 1 can be used according to the situation. Accurate chip exchange patterns C1 to C4 can be displayed.
なお、上の実施形態では、複数種類のチップ交換パターンを画面に表示(候補表示モード)して、客にいずれかのチップ交換パターンを選択してもらうものとしたが、本開示はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、最初に1種類のチップ交換パターンを画面に表示し、客がそのチップ交換パターンを気に入らないときは、次のチップ交換パターンを画面に表示する、というような制御を行ってもかまわない。
In the above embodiment, a plurality of types of chip replacement patterns are displayed on the screen (candidate display mode), and the customer selects one of the chip replacement patterns. However, the present disclosure is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the control may be performed such that one type of chip replacement pattern is first displayed on the screen, and if the customer does not like the chip replacement pattern, the next chip replacement pattern is displayed on the screen.
また、上の実施形態では、候補表示モードで選択されたチップ交換パターンを、図28Cに示すように、改めて単独で表示するものとしたが、本開示はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、図30に示すように、候補表示モードの画面において、選択されたチップ交換パターンC4を強調して表示してもよい。強調する態様としては、図30に示すように、拡大したり、縁取りしたり、ハイライト化したり、その他様々なものが考えられる。
In the above embodiment, the chip replacement pattern selected in the candidate display mode is again displayed alone as shown in FIG. 28C, but the present disclosure is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the selected chip replacement pattern C4 may be highlighted and displayed on the candidate display mode screen. As a mode of emphasis, as shown in FIG. 30, enlargement, edging, highlighting, and various other things can be considered.
また、チップ交換パターンの生成のための制約条件は、上述したものに限られるものではなく、その他様々なものが考えられる。例えば、各チップの上限枚数を制限する、高額チップを優先する、特定のチップを避ける、などといった制約条件が考えられる。また、これらの制約条件は、上位サーバー100から送信するようにしてもよい。例えば、営業開始前に制約条件を送信してもいいし、あるいは、客に応じて、制約条件の優先順位を変更するようにしてもよい。
Further, the constraint conditions for generating the chip exchange pattern are not limited to those described above, and various other conditions can be considered. For example, there are constrained conditions such as limiting the upper limit number of chips, giving priority to expensive chips, and avoiding specific chips. Further, these constraint conditions may be transmitted from the upper server 100. For example, the constraint condition may be transmitted before the start of business, or the priority order of the constraint condition may be changed according to the customer.
また、上の実施形態では、装置1は第1および第2ディスプレイ81,82という2つの画面表示部を有しており、各画面表示部において、チップ交換パターンを表示するものとしたが、これに限られるものではない。画面表示部の個数は1個でもいいし、3個以上であってもよい。また、画面表示部が複数個ある場合、一部の画面表示部にのみ、チップ交換パターンを表示するようにしてもよい。
Further, in the above embodiment, the apparatus 1 has two screen display parts, the first and second displays 81 and 82, and the chip exchange pattern is displayed on each screen display part. It is not limited to. The number of screen display units may be one, or three or more. When there are a plurality of screen display units, the chip replacement pattern may be displayed only on a part of the screen display units.
(通貨識別情報及び計数値の表示モード)
図31A,図31Bは通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示画面の一例である。図31A,図31Bの例では、通貨識別情報の一例として、通貨コードを画面に表示している。「HKD」は香港ドルの通貨コードである。図31Aでは、画面中央に紙幣の計数値VLが表示されており、画面の左上方に通貨識別情報CI1が小さく表示されている。一方、図31Bでは、画面の左手に通貨識別情報CI2が大きく表示されている。本実施形態では、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードとして、図31Aのような画面を示す表示モード(第1モード)と、通貨識別情報の表示態様が第1モードと異なっており、図31Bのような画面を示す(第2モード)とを有している。すなわち、第2モードでは、通貨識別情報CI2が、第1モードと比較してより強調されて表示されている。 (Display mode for currency identification information and count values)
31A and 31B are examples of display screens showing both currency identification information and banknote count values. In the example of FIGS. 31A and 31B, a currency code is displayed on the screen as an example of currency identification information. “HKD” is the currency code of Hong Kong dollar. In FIG. 31A, the bill count value VL is displayed at the center of the screen, and the currency identification information CI1 is displayed small at the upper left of the screen. On the other hand, in FIG. 31B, the currency identification information CI2 is displayed large on the left hand of the screen. In the present embodiment, thescreen control unit 68 has a display mode (first mode) showing a screen as shown in FIG. 31A as a display mode for currency identification information and banknote count values, and the display mode for currency identification information is first. This mode is different from the mode and has a screen (second mode) as shown in FIG. 31B. That is, in the second mode, the currency identification information CI2 is displayed with more emphasis compared to the first mode.
図31A,図31Bは通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示画面の一例である。図31A,図31Bの例では、通貨識別情報の一例として、通貨コードを画面に表示している。「HKD」は香港ドルの通貨コードである。図31Aでは、画面中央に紙幣の計数値VLが表示されており、画面の左上方に通貨識別情報CI1が小さく表示されている。一方、図31Bでは、画面の左手に通貨識別情報CI2が大きく表示されている。本実施形態では、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードとして、図31Aのような画面を示す表示モード(第1モード)と、通貨識別情報の表示態様が第1モードと異なっており、図31Bのような画面を示す(第2モード)とを有している。すなわち、第2モードでは、通貨識別情報CI2が、第1モードと比較してより強調されて表示されている。 (Display mode for currency identification information and count values)
31A and 31B are examples of display screens showing both currency identification information and banknote count values. In the example of FIGS. 31A and 31B, a currency code is displayed on the screen as an example of currency identification information. “HKD” is the currency code of Hong Kong dollar. In FIG. 31A, the bill count value VL is displayed at the center of the screen, and the currency identification information CI1 is displayed small at the upper left of the screen. On the other hand, in FIG. 31B, the currency identification information CI2 is displayed large on the left hand of the screen. In the present embodiment, the
そして、画面制御部68は、装置1の動作状態に応じて、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードを切り替えることができる。例えば、装置1が計数動作を行っている計数状態において、紙幣の計数値がより見やすくなるように、第1モード(図31A)を用いる一方、装置1が計数動作を行っていない待機状態において、計数対象の通貨種別がより分かりやすいように、第2モード(図31B)を用いる。
And the screen control unit 68 can switch the display mode of the currency identification information and the bill count value according to the operation state of the apparatus 1. For example, in the counting state in which the device 1 is performing the counting operation, the first mode (FIG. 31A) is used so that the count value of the banknote is easier to see, while in the standby state in which the device 1 is not performing the counting operation, The second mode (FIG. 31B) is used so that the currency type to be counted is easier to understand.
図32は装置1の動作状態に伴う画面表示の変化の一例を示す図である。図32の画面は第1ディスプレイ81に表示されることを想定している。なお、客用の表示画面である第2ディスプレイ82にも同様の表示がなされるが、第2ディスプレイ82にはタッチパネルが設けられていないので、タッチ用ボタンは表示されない。
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a change in the screen display according to the operating state of the apparatus 1. 32 is assumed to be displayed on the first display 81. Although the same display is made on the second display 82 which is a display screen for customers, the touch panel is not provided on the second display 82, so no touch button is displayed.
まず、図32(a)は装置1が待機中のときの画面例である。画面制御部68は第2モードを用いており、通貨識別情報が大きく表示されている。このとき、担当者が操作入力部66(ここでは第1ディスプレイ81のタッチパネル)を介して通貨種別を変更すると、通貨識別情報の内容が変化する。「MOP」はマカオパタカの通貨コードである。担当者が客から紙幣を受け取り、この紙幣を装置1のセット部2にセットし、計数を開始する操作を行う。すると、画面制御部68は表示モードを第1モードに切り替える。これにより、図32(b)のような画面に変化し、通貨識別情報の表示が小さくなり、紙幣の計数値がより目立つようになる。計数が完了すると図32(c)のような画面になる。担当者がタッチパネルの「ACCEPT」ボタンを押下すると、計数値の確定処理が行われ、確定処理が終了した後、画面制御部68は表示モードを第2モードに切り替える。これにより、図32(d)のような画面にもどる。
First, FIG. 32A shows an example of a screen when the apparatus 1 is on standby. The screen control unit 68 uses the second mode, and currency identification information is displayed large. At this time, when the person in charge changes the currency type via the operation input unit 66 (here, the touch panel of the first display 81), the content of the currency identification information changes. “MOP” is the currency code of Macau Pataca. The person in charge receives the banknote from the customer, sets the banknote in the setting unit 2 of the apparatus 1, and performs an operation of starting counting. Then, the screen control unit 68 switches the display mode to the first mode. Thereby, it changes to a screen like FIG.32 (b), the display of currency identification information becomes small, and the counted value of a banknote becomes more conspicuous. When the counting is completed, a screen as shown in FIG. When the person in charge depresses the “ACCEPT” button on the touch panel, count value confirmation processing is performed, and after the confirmation processing ends, the screen control unit 68 switches the display mode to the second mode. As a result, the screen returns to the screen as shown in FIG.
このように本実施形態によると、画面制御部68の制御によって、計数対象として設定された通貨種別を示す通貨識別情報と、紙幣の計数値とが、第1および第2ディスプレイ81,82に併せて表示される。これにより、装置1を操作する担当者や装置1を利用する客は、紙幣の計数結果とともに、どの種類の通貨が計数されたかを容易に認識することができる。また、通貨識別情報および計数値の表示モードとして、通貨識別情報の表示態様が異なる2種類の表示モードがあるので、例えば紙幣計数装置1の動作状態に応じて、通貨識別情報の表示態様を適切に選択することができる。
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the currency control information indicating the currency type set as the counting target and the count value of the banknote are combined in the first and second displays 81 and 82 by the control of the screen control unit 68. Displayed. Thereby, the person in charge who operates apparatus 1 and the customer who uses apparatus 1 can recognize easily which kind of currency was counted with the counting result of a bill. Moreover, since there are two types of display modes in which the display mode of the currency identification information is different as the display mode of the currency identification information and the count value, for example, the display mode of the currency identification information is appropriately set according to the operating state of the bill counting device 1. Can be selected.
なお、上の実施形態では、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示モードとして、2種類のモードを有するものとしたが、これに限られるものではなく、3種類以上の表示モードを有してもいい。あるいは、1種類のみの固定された表示モードを有していてもよい。
In the above embodiment, the screen control unit 68 has two types of display modes indicating both the currency identification information and the bill count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may have more than one display mode. Alternatively, it may have only one type of fixed display mode.
また、上の実施形態では、表示する通貨識別情報の例として通貨コードを用いて説明を行ったが、通貨識別情報は通貨コードに限られるものではなく、例えば、通貨の名称、通貨を表すイラストや画像などを用いてもかまわない。
Further, in the above embodiment, the description has been given using the currency code as an example of the currency identification information to be displayed. However, the currency identification information is not limited to the currency code, for example, an illustration representing the currency name and currency. Or images may be used.
また、上の実施形態では、装置1は第1および第2ディスプレイ81,82という2つの画面表示部を有しており、各画面表示部において、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を表示するものとしたが、これに限られるものではない。画面表示部の個数は1個でもいいし、3個以上であってもよい。また、画面表示部が複数個ある場合、一部の画面表示部にのみ、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を表示するようにしてもよい。
Further, in the above embodiment, the device 1 has two screen display parts, the first and second displays 81 and 82, and displays both the currency identification information and the bill count value on each screen display part. However, this is not a limitation. The number of screen display units may be one, or three or more. Moreover, when there are a plurality of screen display units, both the currency identification information and the bill count value may be displayed only on some screen display units.
また、表示モードの切り替えを行うタイミングは、上で説明したものに限られるものではない。例えば、通貨識別情報を大きく表示する第2モードから第1モードに切り替えるタイミングとして、紙幣がセット部2に置かれたことをセンサで検知したタイミング、最初の紙幣が識別部3を通過したタイミング、最初の紙幣が保持部4に出たタイミングなどを用いてもよい。また、通貨識別情報を強調して表示するモードを、装置1が担当者を例えばIDカードの読み取り等によって認証したときや、設定変更を行うときなどに用いてもよい。
Also, the timing for switching the display mode is not limited to that described above. For example, the timing at which the sensor detects that a bill has been placed on the set unit 2, the timing at which the first bill has passed through the identification unit 3, as the timing for switching from the second mode to the first mode for displaying currency identification information large, You may use the timing etc. when the first banknote came out to the holding | maintenance part 4. FIG. Further, a mode for emphasizing and displaying the currency identification information may be used when the apparatus 1 authenticates the person in charge, for example, by reading an ID card, or when changing the setting.
また、上の実施形態では、複数の表示モード間で、通貨識別情報の表示サイズを変えるものとしたが、通貨識別情報の表示態様を変える手法は、これに限られるものではない。例えば、通貨識別情報に付す色や模様等を変えてもよいし、表示する輝度等を変えてもかまわない。あるいは、通貨識別情報を、第1モードでは点滅表示し、第2モードでは点滅なしで表示するようにしてもよい。
In the above embodiment, the display size of the currency identification information is changed between a plurality of display modes, but the method of changing the display mode of the currency identification information is not limited to this. For example, the color or pattern attached to the currency identification information may be changed, or the brightness to be displayed may be changed. Alternatively, the currency identification information may be displayed blinking in the first mode and displayed without blinking in the second mode.
-他の表示モードの例-
図33A,図33Bは通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示画面の他の例である。図33Aでは、通貨識別情報CI3として、通貨のイメージカラーすなわち通貨の種別を表す色(例えば赤色)を表示している。一方、図33Bでは、通貨識別情報CI4として、通貨コードとイメージカラーとを併せて表示している。すなわち、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードとして、図33Aのように通貨種別を色のみで表示する表示モード(第1モード)と、図33Bのように通貨種別を文字および色で表示する表示モード(第2モード)とを有していてもよい。すなわち、第2モードでは、通貨識別情報CI4が、第1モードと比較してより強調されて表示されている。そして、画面制御部68は、例えば、紙幣計数装置1が計数動作を行っている計数状態において、紙幣の計数値がより見やすくなるように、第1モード(図33A)を用いる一方、紙幣計数装置1が計数動作を行っていない待機状態において、計数対象の通貨種別がより分かりやすいように、第2モード(図33B)を用いるようにすればよい。 -Examples of other display modes-
33A and 33B are other examples of display screens showing both the currency identification information and the bill count value. In FIG. 33A, a currency image color, that is, a color (for example, red) representing a currency type is displayed as the currency identification information CI3. On the other hand, in FIG. 33B, the currency code and the image color are displayed together as the currency identification information CI4. That is, thescreen control unit 68 displays the currency identification information and the count value of the banknote as a display mode (first mode) for displaying the currency type only in color as shown in FIG. 33A and a currency type as shown in FIG. 33B. May be displayed in characters and colors (second mode). That is, in the second mode, the currency identification information CI4 is displayed more emphasized than in the first mode. And the screen control part 68 uses a 1st mode (FIG. 33A) on the other hand so that it may become easy to see the count value of a banknote in the count state which the banknote counter 1 is performing count operation, for example. In the standby state where 1 is not performing the counting operation, the second mode (FIG. 33B) may be used so that the currency type to be counted is more easily understood.
図33A,図33Bは通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示画面の他の例である。図33Aでは、通貨識別情報CI3として、通貨のイメージカラーすなわち通貨の種別を表す色(例えば赤色)を表示している。一方、図33Bでは、通貨識別情報CI4として、通貨コードとイメージカラーとを併せて表示している。すなわち、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードとして、図33Aのように通貨種別を色のみで表示する表示モード(第1モード)と、図33Bのように通貨種別を文字および色で表示する表示モード(第2モード)とを有していてもよい。すなわち、第2モードでは、通貨識別情報CI4が、第1モードと比較してより強調されて表示されている。そして、画面制御部68は、例えば、紙幣計数装置1が計数動作を行っている計数状態において、紙幣の計数値がより見やすくなるように、第1モード(図33A)を用いる一方、紙幣計数装置1が計数動作を行っていない待機状態において、計数対象の通貨種別がより分かりやすいように、第2モード(図33B)を用いるようにすればよい。 -Examples of other display modes-
33A and 33B are other examples of display screens showing both the currency identification information and the bill count value. In FIG. 33A, a currency image color, that is, a color (for example, red) representing a currency type is displayed as the currency identification information CI3. On the other hand, in FIG. 33B, the currency code and the image color are displayed together as the currency identification information CI4. That is, the
図34A,図34Bは通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の両方を示す表示画面の他の例である。図34Aでは、通貨識別情報CI5として、紙幣計数装置1が計数の対象としている複数の通貨種別(図では「HKD」香港ドルと「MOP」マカオパタカ)が表示されている。一方、図34Bでは、通貨識別情報CI6として、計数対象候補となる複数の通貨種別が表示され、かつ、計数対象として設定された通貨種別(ここでは「HKD」香港ドル)が他の通貨種別と比べて強調して表示されている。図34Bの例では、「HKD」がハイライト表示されている一方で、「MOP」の表示輝度が低下している。すなわち、画面制御部68は、通貨識別情報及び紙幣の計数値の表示モードとして、図34Bのように、計数対象として設定された通貨種別を他の通貨種別と比べて強調表示する表示モードを有していてもよい。例えば、装置1が通貨種別の認識機能を備えている場合には、セットされた紙幣を計数する際に、画面制御部68は、図34Bに示すように、装置1が認識した通貨種別を強調表示するようにしてもよい。
34A and 34B are other examples of display screens showing both currency identification information and banknote count values. In FIG. 34A, a plurality of currency types (“HKD” Hong Kong dollars and “MOP” Macau Patacas in the figure) that are counted by the bill counting device 1 are displayed as the currency identification information CI5. On the other hand, in FIG. 34B, a plurality of currency types that are candidates for counting are displayed as the currency identification information CI6, and the currency type set as the counting target (here, “HKD” Hong Kong dollar) is compared with other currency types. Is highlighted. In the example of FIG. 34B, “HKD” is highlighted, while the display brightness of “MOP” is lowered. That is, the screen control unit 68 has a display mode for highlighting the currency type set as the counting target as compared with other currency types, as shown in FIG. 34B, as the display mode of the currency identification information and the bill count value. You may do it. For example, when the device 1 has a currency type recognition function, the screen control unit 68 emphasizes the currency type recognized by the device 1 as shown in FIG. 34B when counting the set banknotes. You may make it display.
また、本実施形態に係る装置1は、例えばチップを用いた遊技を行う遊技場に設置された場合、紙幣の計数値のデータを遊技場に設けられたモニターに表示させるように構成することも可能である。例えば、装置1を遊技場に構築された情報システムと有線または無線で接続し、装置1によって計数された計数値のデータを当該情報システムに送信可能にする。送信された計数値は、当該情報システムにネットワークを介して接続されたモニターに表示される。これにより、遊技場の客は、紙幣の計数値を遊技場のモニターを介して見ることができる。この場合、装置1に設けられた客用の画面表示部である第2ディスプレイ82を省いてもかまわない。
In addition, when the apparatus 1 according to the present embodiment is installed, for example, in a game hall where a game using chips is performed, the bill count value data may be displayed on a monitor provided in the game hall. Is possible. For example, the device 1 is connected to an information system constructed in a game arcade by wire or wireless, and the count data counted by the device 1 can be transmitted to the information system. The transmitted count value is displayed on a monitor connected to the information system via a network. Thereby, the customer of a game hall can see the count value of a banknote through the monitor of a game hall. In this case, the second display 82 that is a screen display unit for customers provided in the apparatus 1 may be omitted.
なお、以上の説明は紙幣計数装置を例にとって行ったが、上述したような通貨識別情報及び計数値の表示については、例えば、硬貨を計数する硬貨計数装置にも適用してもよい。あるいは、紙幣および硬貨の両方を計数する装置にも適用してもよい。すなわち、本開示の内容は、複数種類の通貨について、貨幣を計数可能な貨幣計数装置に適用することが可能である。
In addition, although the above description was performed taking the banknote counting device as an example, the display of the currency identification information and the count value as described above may be applied to, for example, a coin counting device that counts coins. Or you may apply also to the apparatus which counts both a banknote and a coin. That is, the contents of the present disclosure can be applied to a money counting apparatus capable of counting money for a plurality of types of currencies.
1 紙幣計数装置
2 セット部
3 識別部
31 光学センサ
32 厚みセンサ
33 磁気センサ
36 ガイドローラー
4 保持部
5 搬送部
50 開口部
51~53 第1~第3搬送路
55~57 第1~第3ガイド
510 カバー部材
B 紙幣 DESCRIPTION OFSYMBOLS 1 Bill counting device 2 Set part 3 Identification part 31 Optical sensor 32 Thickness sensor 33 Magnetic sensor 36 Guide roller 4 Holding part 5 Conveyance part 50 Openings 51-53 1st-3rd conveyance path 55-57 1st-3rd guide 510 cover member B banknote
2 セット部
3 識別部
31 光学センサ
32 厚みセンサ
33 磁気センサ
36 ガイドローラー
4 保持部
5 搬送部
50 開口部
51~53 第1~第3搬送路
55~57 第1~第3ガイド
510 カバー部材
B 紙幣 DESCRIPTION OF
Claims (10)
- 紙幣の識別及び計数を行うように構成された紙幣計数装置であって、
計数対象の前記紙幣がセットされるよう構成されたセット部と、
前記セット部から繰り出された前記紙幣の識別及び計数を行うよう構成された識別部と、
前記識別部が識別を行った後の前記紙幣を保持するよう構成された保持部と、
前記セット部と前記保持部との間をつなぐ搬送路を有しかつ、前記セット部から繰り出された前記紙幣を一枚ずつ、前記識別部を通過させた後、前記保持部にまで搬送するよう構成された搬送部と、を備え、
前記セット部は、当該セット部にセットされた前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成され、
前記保持部は、当該保持部に保持した前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を見ることができるように構成され、
前記搬送部は、前記搬送路に沿って前記紙幣が搬送されている最中に、前記紙幣の少なくとも一部分を、常時、見ることができるように構成されていることを特徴とする紙幣計数装置。 A bill counting device configured to identify and count bills,
A set unit configured to set the bills to be counted; and
An identification unit configured to identify and count the bills fed out from the set unit;
A holding unit configured to hold the banknote after the identification unit performs identification;
It has a conveyance path which connects between the set part and the holding part, and after conveying the bills drawn out from the set part one by one through the identification part, it conveys to the holding part A configured transport unit; and
The set part is configured to be able to see at least a part of the banknote set in the set part,
The holding unit is configured to be able to see at least a part of the banknote held in the holding unit,
The banknote counting device is configured so that at least a part of the banknote can be always seen while the banknote is being transported along the transport path. - 前記搬送路は、搬送される前記紙幣の表面及び裏面に相対するように配置されたガイドによって構成され、前記ガイド同士の間には、前記搬送路に沿って開口する開口部が設けられており、
前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の一部分が前記開口部から外に飛び出した状態で、前記紙幣を前記搬送路に沿って搬送することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The said conveyance path is comprised by the guide arrange | positioned so as to oppose the surface and the back surface of the said banknote conveyed, The opening part opened along the said conveyance path is provided between the said guides. ,
2. The bill counting device according to claim 1, wherein the transport unit transports the bills along the transport path in a state in which a part of the bills protrudes from the opening. - 前記識別部は、前記紙幣が進入する入口部と、前記紙幣が退出する出口部とを有するトンネル状に構成され、
前記識別部は、前記紙幣が通過をするときに、前記紙幣の搬送方向先側の一部分が前記出口部から出た状態で、前記紙幣の搬送方向後側の一部分が前記入口部に入る前の状態になる形状であることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The identification part is configured in a tunnel shape having an entrance part into which the banknote enters and an exit part from which the banknote exits,
When the banknote passes, the identification unit is in a state where a part of the banknote in the transport direction is out of the exit part, and a part of the banknote in the transport direction rear side is before the entrance part. The bill counting device according to claim 2, wherein the bill counting device has a shape to be in a state. - 前記セット部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣をセットするように構成され、
前記搬送路の開口部は上向きに開口していて、前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の上部が前記開口部から外に飛び出すように、前記紙幣を立てた状態で、長手搬送するように構成され、
前記保持部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣を保持するように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項2又は3に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The set part is configured to set the banknote in a state where the banknote is opened at least upward and is set up with the longitudinal edge of the banknote down.
The opening part of the conveyance path is opened upward, and the conveyance part is configured to convey longitudinally in a state where the banknote is stood so that the upper part of the banknote jumps out of the opening part,
The said holding | maintenance part is comprised so that the said banknote may be hold | maintained in the state which was open | released at least upwards and stood up with the longitudinal edge of the said banknote facing down. The bill counting device described in 1. - 前記識別部は、前記紙幣の表面及び裏面の画像を取得する光学センサと、前記紙幣の厚みを検知する厚みセンサと、前記紙幣の磁気特性を検知する磁気センサと、を有し、
前記光学センサは、立てた状態で長手搬送される前記紙幣の短手長さの全域に亘って延びて配設され、
前記厚みセンサ及び前記磁気センサはそれぞれ、前記開口部よりも下側であって、前記紙幣において前記ガイドによって覆われる部分に対応する高さに配設されていることを特徴とする請求項4に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The identification unit includes an optical sensor that acquires images of the front and back surfaces of the banknote, a thickness sensor that detects the thickness of the banknote, and a magnetic sensor that detects magnetic characteristics of the banknote,
The optical sensor is arranged to extend over the entire short length of the banknote conveyed longitudinally in an upright state,
The thickness sensor and the magnetic sensor are respectively disposed below the opening and at a height corresponding to a portion of the banknote covered by the guide. The bill counting device described. - 前記光学センサ、前記厚みセンサ及び前記磁気センサは、前記紙幣の搬送方向に順に並んでいることを特徴とする請求項5に記載の紙幣計数装置。 6. The bill counting device according to claim 5, wherein the optical sensor, the thickness sensor, and the magnetic sensor are arranged in order in the transport direction of the bill.
- 前記セット部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣をセットするように構成され、
前記搬送路の開口部は上向きに開口していて、前記搬送部は、前記紙幣の上部が前記開口部から外に飛び出すように、前記紙幣を立てた状態で、長手搬送するように構成され、
前記保持部は、少なくとも上向きに開放されていると共に、前記紙幣の長手の縁を下にして立てた状態に、前記紙幣を保持するように構成され、
前記識別部の前記入口部は、前記紙幣の搬送方向に対して上り勾配となるよう傾斜していることを特徴とする請求項3に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The set part is configured to set the banknote in a state where the banknote is opened at least upward and is set up with the longitudinal edge of the banknote down.
The opening part of the conveyance path is opened upward, and the conveyance part is configured to convey longitudinally in a state where the banknote is stood so that the upper part of the banknote jumps out of the opening part,
The holding part is configured to hold the banknote in a state where the holding part is open at least upward and is set up with a longitudinal edge of the banknote down.
4. The bill counting device according to claim 3, wherein the inlet portion of the identification unit is inclined so as to have an upward slope with respect to a transport direction of the bill. - 前記識別部内に前記紙幣を送り出すガイドローラーは、前記入口部の傾斜箇所に対応する搬送方向の位置に配設されている請求項7に記載の紙幣計数装置。 The bill counting device according to claim 7, wherein the guide roller for feeding the bill into the identification unit is disposed at a position in the transport direction corresponding to the inclined portion of the inlet portion.
- 前記開口部から外に飛び出した前記紙幣を覆うように設けられかつ、光透過性の材料によって構成されたカバー部材をさらに備え、
前記搬送路に沿って搬送されている前記紙幣の少なくとも一部は、前記カバー部材を通じて、常時、見ることができるように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項2~8のいずれか1項に記載の紙幣計数装置。 A cover member that is provided so as to cover the banknote that has jumped out of the opening and is made of a light-transmitting material;
9. The system according to claim 2, wherein at least a part of the banknotes transported along the transport path can be always viewed through the cover member. The bill counting device described in 1. - 前記搬送路の少なくとも一部は、光透過性の材料によって構成されており、
前記搬送路に沿って搬送されている前記紙幣の少なくとも一部は、前記搬送路において、前記光透過性の材料によって構成された部分を通じて、常時、見ることができるように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の紙幣計数装置。 At least a part of the transport path is made of a light transmissive material,
It is configured that at least a part of the banknotes being conveyed along the conveyance path can be always seen through the portion constituted by the light-transmitting material in the conveyance path. The bill counting device according to any one of claims 1 to 9, characterized in that:
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2015076588A JP2016197317A (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2015-04-03 | Paper money counting device |
JP2015-076588 | 2015-04-03 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2016157917A1 true WO2016157917A1 (en) | 2016-10-06 |
Family
ID=57005927
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2016/001890 WO2016157917A1 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2016-04-04 | Banknote-counting device |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP2016197317A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2016157917A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP6726593B2 (en) | 2016-10-05 | 2020-07-22 | Kyb株式会社 | Torque sensor |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH11185103A (en) * | 1997-12-19 | 1999-07-09 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Thin piece guide member and utilization device therefor |
JP2005295327A (en) * | 2004-04-01 | 2005-10-20 | Seiko Epson Corp | Image reader |
JP2007058369A (en) * | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-08 | Mamiya Op Co Ltd | Bill identifying unit |
JP2008102661A (en) * | 2006-10-18 | 2008-05-01 | Seiko Epson Corp | Check reading device and its control method |
WO2008050461A1 (en) * | 2006-10-24 | 2008-05-02 | Glory Ltd. | Sheets counting device |
JP2010186448A (en) * | 2009-02-13 | 2010-08-26 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Medium processor |
-
2015
- 2015-04-03 JP JP2015076588A patent/JP2016197317A/en active Pending
-
2016
- 2016-04-04 WO PCT/JP2016/001890 patent/WO2016157917A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH11185103A (en) * | 1997-12-19 | 1999-07-09 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Thin piece guide member and utilization device therefor |
JP2005295327A (en) * | 2004-04-01 | 2005-10-20 | Seiko Epson Corp | Image reader |
JP2007058369A (en) * | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-08 | Mamiya Op Co Ltd | Bill identifying unit |
JP2008102661A (en) * | 2006-10-18 | 2008-05-01 | Seiko Epson Corp | Check reading device and its control method |
WO2008050461A1 (en) * | 2006-10-24 | 2008-05-02 | Glory Ltd. | Sheets counting device |
JP2010186448A (en) * | 2009-02-13 | 2010-08-26 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Medium processor |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP2016197317A (en) | 2016-11-24 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
KR101322374B1 (en) | Banknote recognition and counting machine and banknote recognition and counting method | |
JP2011067339A (en) | Chip counting device and management system | |
EP2950279B1 (en) | Currency validation | |
WO2016042947A1 (en) | Game device provided with lottery mechanism | |
WO2016157917A1 (en) | Banknote-counting device | |
JP5594319B2 (en) | Trading device | |
JP6356662B2 (en) | Banknote handling equipment | |
WO2014148000A1 (en) | Paper currency-processing device | |
EP3211608B1 (en) | Paper sheet processing device, paper sheet processing system, and paper sheet processing method | |
CN106463011B (en) | Cash treatment | |
EP2188787B1 (en) | Method and system for dust prevention in a coin handling machine | |
JP2013257622A (en) | Cash processor | |
WO2017131120A1 (en) | Banknote counting apparatus | |
JP2003077026A (en) | Method and device for discriminating fake from real bill | |
CN204614006U (en) | Paper currency counting device | |
JP2020164330A (en) | Medium processing device and unit connection method of medium processing device | |
JP2014229240A (en) | Paper processing system and method | |
JP5590264B1 (en) | Trading device | |
JP6249551B2 (en) | Article delivery and storage device | |
JP2004164110A (en) | Automatic vending machine | |
JP2017134804A (en) | Bank note counter | |
JP6249550B2 (en) | Article delivery and storage device | |
JP6774882B2 (en) | Money processing device | |
JP2008176537A (en) | Automatic transaction machine | |
JP6855727B2 (en) | Adjustment machine |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 16771803 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 16771803 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |